Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Service Guide: RS/6000 7025 F50 Series

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 358

RS/6000 7025 F50 Series IBM

Service Guide

SA38-0541-01

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Second Edition (February 1998)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where
such provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS
IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions
of the publication. The manufacturer may make improvements and/or changes in the
product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time, without notice.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, products
(machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country.
Such references or information must not be construed to mean that these products,
programming, or services will be announced in your country. Any reference to a specific
licensed program in this publication is not intended to state or imply that you can use only that
licensed program. You can use any functionally equivalent program instead.

Requests for technical information about products should be made to your authorized reseller
or marketing representative.

 International Business Machines Corporation 1997, 1998. All rights reserved.


Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted rights -- Use,
duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth is GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Communications Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii


Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du Canada . viii
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . viii
VCCI Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Radio Protection for Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
European Union (EU) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
VCCI Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x

Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Laser Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv


ISO 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Chapter 1. Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


System Unit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Typical Boot Sequence for RS/6000 7025 F50 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Service Inspection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Entry MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
MAP 1020: Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
MAP 1520: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
SSA Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
MAP 2010: SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive–Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


Firmware/POST Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Checkpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Preface iii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Physical Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
AIX Location Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
SSA Location Code Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
SSA Loops and Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
SSA Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Service Aid Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Using the Service Aids for SSA-Link Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Finding the Physical Location of a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Microcode Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Vital Product Data (VPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93

Chapter 4. Loading the System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Graphical System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
MultiBoot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
RIPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Text-Based System Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Handling Static–Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive, Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
I/O Planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Service Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Operator Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Operator Panel Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Serial/Parallel Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

iv Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 7. Parts Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1


Disk Drive Module Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Adapter Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Service Request Numbers (SRNs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
SSA Loop Configurations That Are Not Valid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1


Service Processor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
General User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Privileged User Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Service Processor Functions and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24

Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1


Testing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Appendix D. Modem Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1


Sample Modem Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Configuration File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Modem Configuration Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

Reader's Comments — We'd Like to Hear From You . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-3

Preface v
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
vi Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Communications Statements

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement


Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. Neither the provider nor the manufacturer are responsible
for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Statement

This product has been designed and built to comply with IEC Standard 950.

United Kingdom Telecommunications Safety Requirements

This equipment is manufactured to the International Safety Standard EN60950 and


as such is approved in the UK under the General Approval Number
NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to the public telecommunication network.

The network adapter interfaces housed within this equipment are approved
separately, each one having its own independent approval number. These interface
adapters, supplied by the manufacturer, do not use or contain excessive voltages. An
excessive voltage is one which exceeds 70.7 V peak ac or 120 V dc. They interface
with this equipment using Safe Extra Low Voltages only. In order to maintain the
separate (independent) approval of the manufacturer's adapters, it is essential that

Preface vii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
other optional cards, not supplied by the manufacturer, do not use main voltages or
any other excessive voltages. Seek advice from a competent engineer before
installing other adapters not supplied by the manufacturer.

European Union (EU) Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive


89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility.

Neither the provider nor the manufacturer can accept responsibility for any failure to
satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non–recommended modification
of the product, including the fitting of option cards not supplied by the manufacturer.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22 / European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication devices.

Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du


Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Réglement


sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian


Interference–Causing Equipment Regulations.

VCCI Statement

The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above.

viii Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference from Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this is used near a
radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it may cause radio
interference. Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual.

When used near a radio or TV receiver, it may become the cause of radio
interference.

Read the instructions for correct handling.

Radio Protection for Germany

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG vom
9.Nov.92 das EG–Konformitätszeichen zu führen.

Der Aussteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die IBM Germany.

Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse B.

Preface ix
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Note: If any of the following Feature Codes are installed:
3615, 4356, 4357, 4358, 4359, 6218, 8130, or 8134,
or if a configuration using more than one SysKonnect FDDI adapter (Feature
Codes 2741, 2742, or 2743) where any one of them is Feature Code 2743
(SysKonnect SK-NET FDDI-UP SAS PCI), the following statement applies:

European Union (EU) Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive


89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility. The manufacturer cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of option cards supplied by third
parties. Consult with your dealer or sales representative for details on your specific
hardware.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22 / European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may


cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

VCCI Statement

The following is a summary of the VCCI Japanese statement in the box above.

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used
in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs,
the user may be required to take corrective actions.

x Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Notices

A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
death or serious personal injury.

A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing
moderate or minor personal injury.

Electrical Safety

Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or
disconnecting devices attached to the workstation.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous


voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power


cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,


ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables


to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations,


printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.

Preface xi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
DANGER

To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from


the electrical outlet before relocating the system.

xii Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Laser Safety Information
The optical drive in this system unit is a laser product. The optical drive has a label
that identifies its classification. The label, located on the drive, is shown below.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
IEC 825:1984 CENELEC EN 60 825:1991

The optical drive in this system unit is certified in the U.S. to conform to the
requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal
Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere,
the drive is certified to conform to the requirements of the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 825 (1st edition 1984) and CENELEC EN 60
825:1991 for Class 1 laser products.

CAUTION:
A class 3 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the drive
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the drive as it
is not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.

Class 1 laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The optical drive
contains internally a Class 3B gallium-arsenide laser that is nominally 30 milliwatts at
830 nanometers. The design incorporates a combination of enclosures, electronics,
and redundant interlocks such that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a
Class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing conditions.

Preface xiii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xiv Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


About This Book

This book provides maintenance information that is specific to the system unit,
adapters, and attached devices that do not have their own service information. It also
contains Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs) that are not common to other
systems.

MAPs that are common to all systems are contained in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

This book is used by the service technician to repair system failures. This book
assumes that the service technician has had training on the system unit.

ISO 9000

ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and
manufacturing of this product.

Related Publications

The following publications are available for purchase:


Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 7025 F50 Series User's Guide contains information to help
users set up, install options, configure, modify, and solve minor problems.
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems contains
common diagnostic procedures, error codes, service request numbers, and
failing function codes. This manual is intended for trained service technicians.
Ÿ The IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus
Systems contains information about adapters, external devices, and cabling. This
manual is intended to supplement information found in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Ÿ The Site and Hardware Planning Information contains information to help you
plan your installation.

Preface xv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xvi Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 1. Reference Information

System Unit Locations

Front View with Media Door Off

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Rear View

1-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SCSI IDs and Bay Locations

Note: The SCSI bus ID's in Bays A1, B1 and B2 are the recommended values.
Features installed at the manufacturing site correspond to these IDs. Field
installations may not comply with these recommendations.

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I/O Planar Locations

J1, J2 64-bit PCI connectors


J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8P, J9P 32-bit PCI connectors
J8I, J9I ISA connectors
J10 Service Processor
J11 External SCSI connector
J12 Fan #1 (Bottom Fan)
J13 Diskette Drive connector
J15 Fan #3
J16 SCSI Security Jumper
J17 Fan #2
J18 Ethernet connector (thick)

1-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


J19 Fan #4 (Top Fan)
J21 Ethernet connector (twisted pair)
J22A Operator Panel
J23 Keyboard connector
J25 Internal SCSI connector (port 1)
J26 System Card connector
J27 Mouse connector
J30 Internal SCSI connector (port 2)
J41 Serial connector (serial port 1 and 2)
J43 Battery Socket
J47 Parallel connector
J50 Serial connector (serial port 3)
P1, P2 Power Supply

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Card Locations

J5, J6 Processor card connector #2


J8, J9 Processor card connector #1
J12 Memory card connector #1
J13 Memory card connector #2

Memory Card Locations

1-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operator Panel

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Data Flow

1-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Typical Boot Sequence for RS/6000 7025 F50 Series

After the A/C power is turned on, the System Support Controller (SSC) startup
begins, and releases reset to the Service Processor. If the SSC cannot
communicate with the Service Processor, the LCD displays 4BA00000. If the
Service Processor is not present, the LCD displays 4BA00001.
1. Service Processor Self Test
Ÿ Service Processor card performs self test and NVRAM initialization.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E000 - E07F.
Ÿ LCD code is "OK" when complete.
2. Service Processor in Standby Mode
Ÿ You can enter the Service Processor menus whenever the LCD code is
"OK", "STBY", or has an eight digit error code on the LCD display by
pressing the enter key on an ASCII terminal connected to serial port 1.
3. Built-In-Self-Test (BIST)
Ÿ The Service Processor initiates Built-In-Self-Test (BIST) on the Central
Electronics Complex (CEC) chips when the POWER Button is pressed.
Ÿ The VPD data is read and the CRC is checked.
Ÿ The CPU compatibility test is run.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E0A0 - E0E1.
4. System Initialization
Ÿ System firmware begins to execute and initializes system registers after LCD
code E0E1.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E1XX - E2XX.
5. Memory Test
Ÿ The system firmware tests the system memory and identifies failing memory
cards and memory module locations.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E3XX.
6. Device Configuration and Test
Ÿ System firmware checks to see what devices are in the system and performs
a simple test on them.
Ÿ The system firmware displays the device name or device icon being tested.
After the keyboard name or icon appears, the user can enter the Systems
Management Services menu by hitting the "1" key (if ASCII terminal) or the
"F1" key (if Graphics terminal).
Ÿ The user can also enter one of the following:
– "5" or "F5" to start the Stand-alone Diagnostics (CD or Tape).
– "6" or "F6" to start the On-line Diagnostics (Hard Disk)

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
7. IPL Boot Code
Ÿ The system firmware attempts to boot from the devices listed in the Boot
List.
Ÿ LCD Code range is E1XX.
8. Boot Image Execution
Ÿ Once a boot image is located on a device in the Boot List, the system
firmware code hands off control to the AIX Boot code.
– LCD Code E105 for Normal Boot or
– E15B for Service Mode Boot.
Ÿ The AIX Boot code indicates LCD progress codes in the range from 05XX to
09XX.
9. AIX Boot Complete
Ÿ The AIX login prompt appears on the main console.

Specifications

The mechanical packaging, cooling, power supply, and environmental requirements


for the server is shown in the following:

Dimensions

Height - 620 mm (24.3 inches)

Depth - 695 mm (27.3 inches)

Width - 245 mm (9.6 inches)

Weight

Configuration dependent

Operating Environment - Class B

Temperature - 16° to 32°C (60° to 90°F)

Humidity - 8% to 80% noncondensing

Maximum Altitude - 2135 m (7000 feet)

1-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Power Source Loading

Typical EMC Configuration - 0.28 kVA

Maximum - 0.65 kVA

Power Requirements

Typical - 154 watts

Maximum - 450 watts

Power Factor

0.8 - 0.98

Operating Voltage

100 to 127V ac; 50 to 60 Hz

200 to 240V ac; 50 to 60 Hz

Heat Output (Maximum)

Typical - 800 BTU/hr

Maximum - 2300 BTU/hr

Acoustics

6.0 Bels operating

5.5 Bels idle

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power Cables

To avoid electrical shock, a power cable with a grounded attachment plug is


provided. Use only properly grounded outlets.

Power cables used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
These power cords consist of:
Ÿ Electrical cables, Type SVT or SJT.
Ÿ Attachment plugs complying with National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) 5-15P. That is:
"For 115 V operation, use a UL listed cable set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG,
Type SVT or SJT three-conductor cord a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel
blade, grounding type attachment plug rated at 15 A, 125 V."
"For 230 V operation in the United States use a UL listed cable set consisting of a
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT three-conductor cable a maximum of 15 feet in
length, and a tandem blade, grounding type attachment plug rated at 15 A, 250 V."
Ÿ Appliance couplers complying with International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.

Power cables used in other countries consist of the following:


Ÿ Electrical cables, Type HD21.
Ÿ Attachment plugs approved by the appropriate testing organization for the
specific countries where they are used.
"For units set at 230 V (outside of U.S.): use a cable set consisting of a minimum 18
AWG cable and grounding type attachment plug rated 15 A, 250 V. The cable set
should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the equipment
will be installed and should be marked HAR'."

Refer to Chapter 7, “ Parts Information” on page 7-1 to find the power cables that
are available.

1-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Inspection Guide

Perform a service inspection on the system when:


Ÿ The system is inspected for a maintenance agreement.
Ÿ Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.
Ÿ An alterations and attachments review is performed.
Ÿ Changes have been made to the equipment that may affect the safe operation of
the equipment.
Ÿ External devices with their own power cables have those cables attached.

If the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be


corrected before anyone can service the machine.
Note: The correction of any unsafe condition is the responsibility of the owner of the
system.

Perform the following checks:


1. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose the
internal parts of the system unit.
2. Check the covers for proper fit to the system unit. They should be in place and
secure.
3. Gently rock the system unit from side to side to determine if it is steady.
4. Set the power switch of the system unit to Off.
5. Remove the covers.
6. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety
hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.
7. Check the internal cables for damage.
8. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the system unit.
9. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it matches
the voltage at the outlet.
10. Check the external power cable for damage.
11. With the external power cable connected to the system unit, check for 0.1 ohm
or less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cable plug and
the metal frame.
12. Perform the following checks on each device that has its own power cables:
a. Check for damage to the power cord.

Chapter 1. Reference Information 1-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
b. Check for the correct grounded power cable.
c. With the external power cable connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or
less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cable the
metal frame of the device.
13. Install the covers.

1-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs)

Entry MAP

Use the following table to determine your starting point.


Note: When possible, run Online Diagnostics in Service Mode. Online Diagnostics
perform additional functions, compared to Standalone Diagnostics. This ensures that
the error state of the system is captured in NVRAM for your use in fixing the
problem. The AIX error log and SMIT are only available when diagnostics are run
from the hard drive.

Notes:
1. If more than eight digits are displayed in the operator panel, use only the first
eight digits to find the error in the tables. The digits that display beyond the first
eight digits are location codes that can assist you in diagnosing the problem. See
“Location Codes” on page 3-46.
2. Licensed programs frequently rely on network configuration, and system
information stored on the VPD on the operator panel control assembly (connector
U2). If the MAPs indicate that the Operator Panel Control Assembly should be
replaced, swap the VPD from the old operator panel to the new one. If the old
VPD module has to be replaced call technical support for recovery instructions.
If recovery is not possible, notify the system owner that new keys for licensed
programs may be required.
3. If a network adapter, or the I/O planar is replaced, the network administrator
must be notified so that the client IP addresses used by the server can be
changed. In addition, the operating system configuration of the network
controller may need to be changed in order to enable system startup. Also
check to ensure that any client or server that addresses this system is updated.

Symptom Action

Service Actions
You have parts to exchange or a corrective 1. Go to the Removal and Replacement
action to perform. Procedures.
2. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the
IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.
You need to verify that a part exchange or Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
corrective action corrected the problem. RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Symptom Action
You need to verify correct system operation.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems.

Symptom Analysis
You have OK displayed The Service Processor (SP) is ready. The
system is waiting for power on.
You have STBY displayed The Service Processor (SP) is ready. The
system was shutdown by the operating system
and is still powered on. This condition can be
requested by a privileged system user with no
faults. See SP error log for possible operating
system fault indications.
You do not have a determined symptom. Go to “MAP 1020: Problem Determination” on
page 2-6.
You have an 8-digit error code displayed. Record the error code. Go to Chapter 3, “Error
Code to FRU Index” on page 3-1.
You have an SRN. Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
The system POST indicators are displayed on Go to “E1xx Code Boot Problems” on
the system console, the system pauses and page 3-44.
then restarts. The term "POST indicators" refer
to the icons (graphic display) or device
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that appear during
the power-on self-test (POST).
The system stops and POST indicators are 1. Use MAP 1540 to isolate the problem.
displayed on the system console. The term
"POST indicators" refer to the icons (graphic
display) or device mnemonics (ASCII terminal)
that appear during the power-on self-test
(POST).
The system stops and the message "STARTING Go to “Checkpoints” on page 3-29.
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT..." is displayed on

ASCII terminal, the boot indicator ( ) is


displayed on a graphics terminal.

2-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Action
The system does not respond to the password Verify that the password is being entered from
being entered or the system login prompt is the ASCII terminal or keyboard defined as the
displayed when booting in service mode. system console. If so, then the keyboard or its
controller may be faulty.
1. If entering the password from the keyboard
which is attached to the system, replace the
keyboard. If replacing the keyboard does not
fix the problem, replace the I/O planar. (See
notes on 2-1.)
2. If entering the password from a keyboard
which is attached to a ASCII terminal,
suspect the ASCII terminal. Use the
Problem Determination Procedures for the
terminal. Replace the I/O planar if these
procedures do not reveal a problem.
Nothing is displayed on the system console, and 1. If using a graphic display, go to the Problem
the operator panel is blank. Determination Procedures for the display.
2. If you do not find a problem then replace the
display adapter.
3. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration”
on page 2-17.
All display problems. 1. If using a graphics display, go to the
Problem Determination Procedures for the
display.
2. If you do not find a problem then replace the
display adapter.
3. If the problem is with the ASCII terminal:
a. Make sure that the ASCII terminal is
connected to S1.
b. If problems persist, go to the Problem
Determination Procedures for the
terminal.
4. If you do not find a problem then suspect
the I/O planar. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-17.
888 is displayed in the control panel followed by Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
additional error codes. Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Symptom Action
The system stops and a 4-digit number is If the number displayed begins with the
displayed in the operator panel display. character "E0xx" then go to “SP Checkpoints”
on page 3-29. or "E1xx-EFFF" then go to
“Checkpoints” on page 3-29.
For all other numbers record SRN 101-xxx,
where xxx is the last three digits of the four-digit
number displayed in the operator panel, then go
to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Note: If the operator panel displays 2 sets of
numbers, use the bottom set of numbers as the
error code.
The power light does not come on, or stay on. Go to “MAP 1520: Power” on page 2-12.
The operator panel is blank before the system is Reseat the operator panel cable.
powered on (operator panel should display OK).
If problem not resolved, replace in order:
No codes are displayed on the operator panel
within a few seconds of turning on the system. 1. Operator Panel Control Assembly. Remove
the VPD module from the old Operator
Panel Control Assembly (connector U2) and
place in the new one.
2. I/O planar (See notes on 2-1.)
The SMS configuration list or Boot sequence A device may be set to use the same SCSI bus
selection menu shows more SCSI devices ID as the control adapter. Note the ID being
attached to a controller/adapter than are actually used by the controller/adapter (this can be
attached. checked and/or changed via an SMS utility), and
verify that no device attached to the controller is
set to use that ID.
If settings do not appear to be in conflict:
1. Replace the SCSI cable.
2. Replace the device.
3. Replace the SCSI adapter (or I/O planar if
connected to one of the two integrated SCSI
controllers on the I/O planar). (See notes
on 2-1 if the I/O planar is replaced.)
Note: In a "Twin-tailed" configuration where
there is more than one initiator device
(normally another system) attached to
the SCSI bus, it may be necessary to
change the ID of the SCSI controller or
adapter with the System Management
Services.
You cannot load diagnostics. Go to “MAP 1020: Problem Determination” on
page 2-6.
You have a problem that does not prevent the Go to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
system from booting. Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Action
You suspect a cable problem. See the IBM RS/6000 Adapter, Device, and
Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

You Cannot Find the Symptom in this Table


All other problems. Go to “MAP 1020: Problem Determination” on
page 2-6.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MAP 1020: Problem Determination

Purpose of This MAP

Use this MAP to get an error code if you were not provided one by the customer or
you are unable to load diagnostics. If you are able to load the diagnostics, go to
MAP 0020 in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

The Service Processor may have recorded one or more symptoms in its error log. It
is a good idea to examine that error log before proceeding (see Service Processor
System Information Menu).

The Service Processor may have been set by the user to monitor server operations
and to attempt recoveries. You may wish to disable these actions while you diagnose
and service the system. If you disable them, you should make notes of their current
settings for restoration before you leave. Following are the settings of your interest.

Surveillance From the Service Processor Setup Menu, go to


the Surveillance Setup Menu and disable
surveillance.
Unattended Start From the Service Processor System Power
Control Menu, disable unattended start mode.
Reboot Policy From the System Power Control Menu, go to
the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and set:
1. Number of reboot attempts to 0 (zero)
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy to No
3. Enable supplemental restart policy to No.
Call Out From the Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu, go to the
Serial Port Selection Menu and disable call-out
on both serial ports.

Be prepared to record code numbers and use those numbers in the course of
analyzing a problem. Go to “Step 1020-1.”

Step 1020-1

The following steps analyze a failure to load the diagnostic programs.


Note: You are asked questions regarding the operator panel display. You are also
asked to perform certain actions based on displayed POST indicators.
Please be observant of these conditions.

2-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off.
3. Turn the power on.
4. When the keyboard indicator is displayed (the word keyboard on an ASCII
terminal or the keyboard icon on a graphical display), press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Enter any requested passwords.
6. Wait until the diagnostics are loaded or the system appears to stop.
7. Find your symptom in the following table; then follow the instructions given in the
Action column.

Symptom Action
The diskette LED is blinking rapidly, or EIEA or The flash EPROM data is corrupted. The
EIEB is displayed on the operator panel. recovery procedure for the flash EPROM should
be executed. See “Firmware Recovery” on
page 5-23.
The system stops with a prompt to enter a Enter the password. You are not allowed to
password. continue until a correct password has been
entered. When you have entered a valid
password go to the beginning of this table and
wait for one of the other conditions to occur.
The diagnostics loaded. Go to MAP 0020 in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
The system login prompt is displayed. You may not have pressed the correct key or
you may not have pressed the key soon enough
when you were to indicate a Service Mode IPL
of the diagnostic programs. If this was the case
start over at the beginning of this Step.
Note: Perform the systems shutdown
procedure before turning off the system.
If you are sure you pressed the correct key in a
timely manner, go to “Step 1020-2” on
page 2-10.
The system does not respond when the Go to “Step 1020-2” on page 2-10.
password is entered.
The system stopped and a POST indicator is If the POST indicator represents:
displayed on the system console and an
Ÿ memory, record error code M0MEM002.
eight-digit error code is not displayed.
Ÿ keyboard, record error code M0KBD000.
Ÿ SCSI, record error code M0CON000.
Ÿ network, record error code M0NET000.
Ÿ speaker (audio), record error code
M0BT0000.
Go to “Step 1020-3” on page 2-10.

2-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Symptom Action
The system stops and a 4-digit number is If the number displayed begins with the
displayed in the operator panel display. character "E0xx" then go to “SP Checkpoints”
on page 3-29. or "E1xx-EFFF" then go to
“Checkpoints” on page 3-29.
For all other numbers record SRN 101-xxx,
where xxx is the last three digits of the four-digit
number displayed in the operator panel, then go
to the Fast Path MAP in the IBM RS/6000
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
Note: If the operator panel displays 2 sets of
numbers, use the bottom set of numbers as the
error code.
All other symptoms. If you were directed here from the Entry MAP,
go to “MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-17. Otherwise, find the symptom in the
“Entry MAP” on page 2-1.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1020-2

There is a problem with the keyboard.

Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table; then follow the
instructions given in the Action column.

Keyboard Type Action


Type 101 keyboard (U.S.). Identify by the size of Record error code M0KBD001; then go to
the Enter key. The Enter key is in only one “Step 1020-3.”
horizontal row of keys.
Type 102 keyboard (W.T.). Identify by the size of Record error code M0KBD002; then go to
the Enter key. The Enter key extends into two “Step 1020-3.”
horizontal rows.
Type 106 keyboard. (Identify by the Japanese Record error code M0KBD003; then go to
characters.) “Step 1020-3.”
ASCII terminal keyboard Go to the documentation for this type of ASCII
terminal and continue problem determination.

Step 1020-3

Take the following actions:


1. Find the eight-digit error code in Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU Index” on
page 3-1.
Note: If the eight-digit error code is not listed in Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU
Index,” look for it in the following:
Ÿ Any supplemental service manual for the device
Ÿ The diagnostic problem report screen for additional information
Ÿ The Service Hints service aid
Ÿ The CEREADME file (by using the Service Hints service aid).
2. Perform the action listed.

2-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1020-4
1. Turn off, then turn on the system unit.
2. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the F1 key on a directly attached
keyboard or the 1 key on an ASCII terminal.
3. When the System Management Services appear, check the error log for any
errors.
Ÿ Choose Utilities
Ÿ Choose Error Log
Ÿ If an error is logged, check the time stamp.
Ÿ If the error was logged during the current boot attempt, record it.
Ÿ Look up the error in the Chapter 3, “Error Code to FRU Index” on page 3-1
and do the listed action.
Ÿ If no recent error is logged in the error log, go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-17.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MAP 1520: Power
Note: This is not a start of call MAP. Use this Power MAP only if you have been
directed here from a MAP step in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.

This procedure is used to locate power problems in system units. If a problem is


detected, this procedure helps you isolate the problem to a failing unit.

Observe the following safety notice during service procedures.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous


voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent and electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power


cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,


ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use on hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to


prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations,


printers, telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid
electrical shock.

DANGER

To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from


the electrical outlet before relocating the system.

2-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1520-1

You may be directed to this MAP for several reasons:


1. There is no indication of activity when the start/stop switch is pressed. None of
the LEDs light and none of the fans, including the fan in the power supply, start
to turn.
Go to “Step 1520-2.”
2. When the start/stop switch is pressed, the system begins to power on, but the
power LED does not stay on.
Go to “Step 1520-3” on page 2-14.

Step 1520-2
1. Turn the power off.
2. Check that the external power cable to the system unit has continuity.
3. Check that the power outlet has been wired correctly with the correct voltage.
4. Check that the external power cable is plugged into both the system unit and the
power outlet.

Did you find a problem?


NO Go to “Step 1520-3” on page 2-14.
YES Correct the problem. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1520-3
Note: Either the cooling fans, the power supply, the I/O planar, service processor,
or the system card is defective.

To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs that have not already been exchanged in the
following order.
Ÿ Verify that the fan jumper is connected to connector J55.
Ÿ Power supply
Ÿ I/O planar
Ÿ Service Processor
Ÿ System card
Ÿ Front cooling fans (one at a time)
1. Turn the power off.
2. Unplug the system unit power cable from the wall outlet.
3. Exchange one of the FRUs in the list.
4. Connect the system unit power cable to the wall outlet.
5. Turn the power on.

Does the fan in the power supply turn on and the power LED come on and stay
on?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
go to “Step 1520-4” on page 2-15.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1520-4
1. Turn the power off.
2. Unplug the system unit power cable from the wall outlet.
3. Record the slot numbers of all the ISA and PCI adapters. Label and record the
location of any cables attached to the adapters. Remove all the adapters.
4. Remove all installed memory cards.
5. Remove the CPU card(s).
6. Unplug the power cables from all the SCSI devices.
7. Unplug all the fans, except the fan in the power supply.
8. Connect the system unit power cable to the wall outlet.
9. Turn the power on.

Does the fan in the power supply turn on and the power LED come on and stay
on?
NO Replace the I/O planar. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES Go to “Step 1520-5” on page 2-16.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1520-5

One of the parts that was removed or unplugged is causing the problem. Install or
connect the parts in the following order.
1. CPU card(s).
2. Memory cards. (One at a time)
3. SCSI devices, lowest bay to highest bay.
4. PCI cards, lowest slot to highest slot.
5. ISA cards, lowest slot to highest slot.
6. Fans.
Turn the power on after each part is installed or connected. If the system does not
power on or the power LED does not stay on, the most recently installed or
connected part is causing the failure.
1. Turn the power off.
2. Unplug the system unit power cable from the wall outlet.
3. Install or connect one of the parts in the list.
4. Connect the system unit power cable to the wall outlet.
5. Turn the power on.
Does the fan in the power supply turn on and the power LED come on and stay
on?
NO Replace the last part installed.
If the memory card was just installed, remove all of the memory DIMMs. If
the system does not come up, replace the memory card.
Re-install the memory DIMMs, one pair at a time, until the problem recurs.
Replace the memory DIMM pair that was just installed.
Note: The memory DIMM pair must be installed in slots that are next to
each other. For example, install the pair in J1 and J2, not J1 and J3.
Repeat these steps until all the parts have been installed.
If the symptom did not change and all the parts have been replaced, call
your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1520-1” on
page 2-13 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MAP 1540: Minimum Configuration

Notes:
1. Be sure to unplug the power cable before removing or installing Service
Processor, CPU, System Card or I/O planar to avoid damage to them.
2. This MAP assumes that a CD-ROM drive is installed and connected to the
integrated SCSI adapter, and a Diagnostics CD-ROM is available.
3. If a power-on password or privileged-access password is installed, you are
prompted to enter the password before the diagnostic CD-ROM can load.
4. The term "POST indicators" refer to the icons (graphic display) or device
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that appear during the power-on self-test (POST).
5. The Service Processor may have recorded one or more symptoms in its error
log. It is a good idea to examine that error log before proceeding (see Service
Processor System Information Menu).
6. The Service Processor may have been set by the user to monitor server
operations and to attempt recoveries. You may wish to disable these actions
while you diagnose and service the system. If you disable them, you should
make notes of their current settings for restoration before you leave. Following
are the settings of your interest.

Surveillance From the Service Processor Setup Menu, go to


the Surveillance Setup Menu and disable
surveillance.
Unattended Start From the Service Processor System Power
Control Menu disable unattended start mode.
Reboot Policy From the System Power Control Menu go to the
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and set:
1. Number of reboot attempts to 0 (zero)
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy to No
3. Enable supplemental restart policy to No.
Call Out From the Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu, go to the
Serial Port Selection Menu and disable call-out
on both serial ports.

Purpose of this MAP

This MAP is used to locate defective FRUs not found by normal diagnostics. For this
procedure, diagnostics are run on a minimally-configured system. If a failure is
detected on the minimally-configured system, the remaining FRUs are exchanged
one at a time until the failing FRU is identified. If a failure is not detected, FRUs are
added back until the failure occurs. The failure is then isolated to the failing FRU.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-17


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-1
1. Ensure that the diagnostics and the operating system are shut down.
2. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. Turn the power off.
4. Turn the power on.
5. When the keyboard indicator is displayed (the word keyboard on an ASCII
terminal or the keyboard and hand icon on a graphical display), press the F5 key
on the directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal.
6. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?


NO Go to “Step 1540-2” on page 2-19.
YES Go to “Step 1540-12” on page 2-31.

2-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-2
1. Turn the power off.
2. If you have not already done so, configure the Service Processor with the
instructions on step 6 on page 2-17 and then return here and continue.
3. Exit Service Processor Menus and remove the power cable.
4. Disconnect all external cables.
5. Remove the side cover
6. Record the slot numbers of the ISA and PCI adapters. Label and record the
location of any cables attached to the adapters. Remove all the adapters.
7. Remove the second processor card (if present). [If second processor removed,
ensure first CPU cable is installed.]
8. Record the position of the memory DIMMs. Remove all installed memory DIMMs
except for one pair from the first Memory card.
Note: The memory DIMM pair must be installed in slots that are next to each
other. For example, install the pair in J1 and J2, not J1 and J3.
9. Remove the second Memory card, if present.
10. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI connectors on the I/O planar.
11. Disconnect the diskette drive cable from the diskette drive connector on the I/O
planar.
12. Disconnect the internal serial and parallel cables.
13. Plug in the power cable (and wait for OK on the operator panel display).
14. Turn the power on.
15. Wait for the operator panel to stabilize at a checkpoint.
Note: Checkpoints E1F2, E1F3 and STBY are stable as soon as they appear.
Other checkpoints may take up to 3 minutes to assure stability, depending on
system configuration.

Does the operator panel stabilize with code E1F2, E1F3, E1F7, or STBY?
NO Go to “Step 1540-3” on page 2-20.
YES Go to “Step 1540-4” on page 2-21.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-19


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-3

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.

If the following steps call for a I/O planar to be replaced, see notes on page 2-1.

Turn the power off, remove the power cable, and exchange the following FRUs in
order:
1. Processor cards
2. Memory DIMMs (pair)
3. Memory card
4. I/O planar (see notes on page 2-1.)
5. System Card
6. Service Processor

Wait for the operator panel to stabilize at a checkpoint.


Note: Checkpoints E1F2, E1F3 and STBY are stable as soon as they appear.
Other checkpoints may take up to 3 minutes to assure stability, depending on system
configuration.

Does the operator panel stabilize with code E1F2, E1F3, E1F7, or STBY?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat the FRU replacement steps until the defective FRU is identified or
all the FRUs have been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-18 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-4

No failure was detected with this configuration.


1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Install a pair of memory DIMMs.
3. Reinstall the power cable.
4. Turn the power on.
5. Wait for the operator panel to stabilize at a checkpoint.
Note: Checkpoints E1F2, E1F3 and STBY are stable as soon as they appear.
Other checkpoints may take up to 3 minutes to assure stability, depending on
system configuration.

Does the operator panel stabilize with code E1F2, E1F3, E1F7, or STBY?
NO Go to “Step 1540-5” on page 2-22.
YES Repeat this step until all the memory DIMMs are installed and tested.
After all the memory DIMMs are installed and tested, record the positions
of the memory DIMMs in the second memory card. Remove all of the
memory DIMMs from the second memory card except 1 pair. Repeat this
step with the second memory card (if previously installed).
Go to “Step 1540-7” on page 2-24.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-5

The failure may be caused by the last pair of memory DIMMs installed or the
memory card. To isolate the failing FRU, do the following:
1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Exchange the last memory DIMM pair installed.
3. Reinstall the power cable.
4. Turn the power on.
5. Wait for the operator panel to stabilize at a checkpoint.
Note: Checkpoints E1F2, E1F3 and STBY are stable as soon as they appear.
Other checkpoints may take up to 3 minutes to assure stability, depending on
system configuration.

Does the operator panel stabilize with code E1F2, E1F3, E1F7, or STBY?
NO Go to “Step 1540-6” on page 2-23.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-6

One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.


1. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
2. Exchange the following FRUs the order listed.
a. Memory card
b. System card
c. I/O planar (See notes on 2-1.)
d. Power supply.
3. Reinstall the power cable.
4. Turn the power on.
5. Wait for the operator panel to stabilize at a checkpoint.
Note: Checkpoints E1F2, E1F3 and STBY are stable as soon as they appear.
Other checkpoints may take up to 3 minutes to assure stability, depending on
system configuration.

Does the operator panel stabilize with code E1F2, E1F3, E1F7, or STBY?
NO Reinstall the original FRU.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-18 in this MAP, and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-23


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-7
1. Turn the power off.
2. Reconnect the system console.
Notes:
a. If an ASCII terminal has been defined as the system console, attach the
ASCII terminal cable to the to the S1 connector on the rear of the system
unit. Also connect the internal serial and Ethernet cables to the I/O planar.
b. If a display attached to a display adapter has been defined as the system
console, install the display adapter and connect the display to it. Plug the
keyboard into the keyboard connector on the rear of the system unit.
3. Turn the power on.
4. If the ASCII terminal or graphics display (including display adapter) are
connected differently than before, the Console Selection screen appears and
requires that a new console be selected.
5. When the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F1 key on the directly
attached keyboard or the number 1 key on an ASCII terminal. This triggers the
SMS.
6. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.
7. Wait until the SMS screen is displayed or the system appears to stop.

2-24 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Is the SMS screen displayed?
NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged:
1. Go to the Problem Determination Procedures (test procedures) for the
device attached to the S1 serial port or the display attached to the
graphics adapter, and test those devices. If a problem is found,
follow the procedures for correcting the problem on that device.
2. Graphics adapter (if installed).
3. Cable (async or graphics, including internal async cable).
4. I/O planar. (see notes on page 2-1.)
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom changed, check for loose cards and obvious problems. If
you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on page 2-18 and
follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-8” on page 2-26.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-25


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-8
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Plug the internal SCSI cable into the SCSI connector (J25) on the I/O planar.
4. Disconnect the signal and power connectors from all the SCSI devices except
the CD-ROM drive.
5. Reinstall the power cable.
6. Turn the power on.
7. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
8. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.

2-26 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?
NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system unit is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged:
1. SCSI cable
2. Last SCSI device connected (CD-ROM drive, tape drive, etc.)
3. The graphics adapter, if the system console is defined as a graphical
display.
4. I/O planar (see notes on page 2-1.)
5. Processor card
6. Power Supply.
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-18 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Repeat this step, adding one SCSI device at a time, until all the SCSI
devices that were attached to the integrated SCSI adapter are connected
and tested.
Go to “Step 1540-9” on page 2-28.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-27


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-9

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the FRUs (adapters)
that you removed is probably defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Plug the diskette drive cable into the diskette drive connector on the I/O planar.
4. Reinstall the power cable.
5. Turn the power on.
6. After the keyboard indicator is displayed, press the F5 key on the
directly-attached keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
7. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?


NO One of the FRUs remaining in the system is defective.
In the following order, exchange the FRUs that have not been exchanged.
1. Diskette drive
2. Diskette drive cable
3. I/O planar (see notes on page 2-1).
4. Power supply
Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have
been exchanged.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-18 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES Go to “Step 1540-10” on page 2-29.

2-28 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-10

The system is working correctly with this configuration. One of the FRUs (adapters)
that you removed is probably defective,
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Install the second CPU card if one was removed. If a second CPU card was not
removed, or has already been reinstalled and verified, install an I/O Planar
device (parallel port device, serial port device, keyboard or mouse) that had been
removed and any cables that were attached. If all I/O Planar devices have been
reinstalled and verified, install a FRU (adapter) and connect any cables and
devices that were attached to it.
Note: If the FRU you installed requires supplemental media use the Process
Supplemental Media task to load the supplemental media first.
4. Reinstall the power cable.
5. Turn the power on.
6. If the Console Selection screen displays, choose the system console.
7. After the keyboard indicator displayeds, press the F5 key on the directly-attached
keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
8. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?


NO Go to “Step 1540-11” on page 2-30.
YES Repeat this step until all of the FRUs (adapters) are installed, then go to
"MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information
for Multiple Bus Systems.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-29


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-11

The last FRU installed or one of its attached devices is probably defective.
1. Make sure the diagnostic CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Turn the power off and remove the power cable.
3. Starting with the last installed adapter, disconnect one attached device and
cable.
4. Reinstall the power cable.
5. Turn the power on.
6. If the Console Selection screen is displayed, choose the system console.
7. After the keyboard indicator appears, press the F5 key on the directly-attached
keyboard or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal keyboard.
8. Enter the appropriate password when prompted to do so.

Is the "Please define the System Console" screen displayed?


NO Repeat this step until the defective device or cable is identified or all the
devices and cables have been disconnected.
If all the devices and cables have been removed, then one of the FRUs
remaining in the system unit is defective.
To test each FRU, exchange the FRUs in the following order:
1. Adapter (last one installed)
2. I/O planar
If the I/O planar or a network adapter is replaced, see notes on page
2-1.
3. Power supply.
If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.
If the symptom has changed check for loose cards, cables, and obvious
problems. If you do not find a problem return to “Step 1540-1” on
page 2-18 in this MAP and follow the instructions for the new symptom.
YES The last device or cable that you disconnected is defective or if the last
device is the CPU card go to “Step 1540-3” on page 2-20.
Exchange the defective device or cable.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.

2-30 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-12
1. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the system console.
2. When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS screen is displayed,
press Enter.
3. If the terminal type has not been defined, you must use the Initial Terminal option
on the FUNCTION SELECTION menu to initialize the AIX operating system
environment before you can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and
different operation than selecting the console.
4. Select Task Selection.
5. When the NEW RESOURCE screen displays select an option from the bottom of
the screen.
Note: Adapters or devices that require supplemental media are not shown in
the new resource list. If the system has adapters or devices that require a
supplemental media, select option 1.
If the adapter or device requires supplemental media select Process
Supplemental Media from the TASKS SELECTION LIST. Follow the instructions
on the screen after testing the adapters and devices listed on the NEW
RESOURCE screen.
Supplemental media must be loaded and processed one at a time.
6. Select Run Diagnostics from the TASK SELECTION LIST.
7. Select All Resources or the Adapter/Device you loaded from the supplemental
media.

Did you get an SRN?


NO Go to “Step 1540-14” on page 2-33.
YES Go to “Step 1540-13” on page 2-32.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-31


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-13

Look at the FRU part numbers associated with the SRN.

Have you exchanged all the FRUs that correspond to the failing function
codes?
NO Exchange the FRU with the highest failure percentage that has not been
changed.
Repeat this step until all the FRUs associated with the SRN have been
exchanged or diagnostics run with no trouble found. Run diagnostics after
each FRU is exchanged.
If the I/O planar or a network adapter is replaced, see notes on page 2-1.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems.
YES If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged,
call your service support person for assistance.

2-32 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 1540-14

Does the system have adapters or devices that require supplemental media?
NO Go to “Step 1540-15.”
YES Go to “Step 1540-16.”

Step 1540-15

Consult the ISA and PCI adapter configuration documentation for your operating
system to verify that all installed adapters are configured correctly.

Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.

If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged, call your
service support person for assistance.

Step 1540-16

Press Enter to return to the TASKS SELECTION LIST.

Select Process Supplemental Media and follow the on screen instructions to process
the media.

Did the system return to the TASKS SELECTION SCREEN after the
supplemental media was processed?
NO Go to “Step 1540-17” on page 2-34.
YES Go to “Step 1540-12” on page 2-31 substep 6 on page 2-31.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-33


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 1540-17

The Adapter or device is probably defective.

If the supplemental media is for an adapter replace the FRUs in the following order:
1. Adapter.
2. The planar the adapter is plugged into.

If the supplemental media is for a device replace the FRUs in the following order:
1. Device and any associated cables.
2. The adapter the device is attached to.

Repeat this step until the defective FRU is identified or all the FRUs have been
exchanged.

If the symptom did not change and all the FRUs have been exchanged, call your
service support person for assistance.

If the symptom has changed, check for loose cards, cables, and obvious problems.
If you do not find a problem, return to “Step 1540-1” on page 2-18 on this MAP and
follow the instructions for the new symptom.

Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
Multiple Bus Systems.

2-34 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SSA Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs)

These maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs) describe how to analyze a


continuous failure that has occurred in a system that contains two or more disk drive
modules. Failing field-replaceable units (FRUs) of the system unit can be isolated
with these MAPs.

How to Use These MAPs

Attention: Switching off the power to an SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive can cause a
system fault unless you first make the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive modules
unavailable to the system unit. To do this:
1. Use the system-management task menus to make the disk drive modules
unavailable.
2. If the system unit has more than one SSA adapter, make the SSA Hot-Swap
Disk Drive modules unavailable to the system for each of the paths to the SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive.

Attention: Unless the system unit needs to be switched off for some other reason,
do not switch off the power to the system unit when servicing an SSA Hot-Swap Disk
Drive or the external SSA cable.
Ÿ To isolate the FRUs associated with in the failing SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive,
perform the actions and answer the questions given in this MAP.
Ÿ When instructed to exchange two or more FRUs in sequence:
1. Exchange the first FRU in the list for a new one.
2. Verify that the problem is solved. For some problems, verification means
running the diagnostic programs (see the using-system service procedures).
3. If the problem remains:
a. Reinstall the original FRU.
b. Exchange the next FRU in the list for a new one.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until either the problem is solved, or all the related
FRUs have been exchanged.
5. Perform the next action indicated by the MAP.
Ÿ The following table explains the meaning of the Power, Ready and Check status
LEDs.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-35


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Status LEDs
LED Status Definition
Power On Power On
Off Power Off
Ready On Both SSA connections good and
drive is ready
Blinking Only one SSA connection good
Flickering Drive is executing a command
Check On Disk drive failure
Self-test running
Drive in service mode
Blinking Disk drive selected

2-36 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MAP 2010: SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive–Start

This MAP is the entry point to the MAPs for the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive. If you
are not familiar with these MAPs, read “How to Use These MAPs” on page 2-35 first.

You might have been sent here because:


Ÿ The system problem determination procedures sent you here.
Ÿ Action from an SRN list sent you here.
Ÿ A problem occurred during the installation of an SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive
module.
Ÿ Another MAP sent you here.
Ÿ A customer observed a problem that was not detected by the system problem
determination procedures.

Step 2010-1

Have you been sent to this MAP from the Configuration Verification service aid?
NO Go to “Step 2010-3” on page 2-39.
YES Go to “Step 2010-2” on page 2-38.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-37


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 2010-2

One of the following conditions exist. Take the action described.


1. You have an hdisk that has no associated pdisk.
a. Issue the system cfgmgr command.
b. Retry the Configuration Verification service aid.
c. If the problem remains, a software error has probably occurred. Call your
support center for assistance.
2. You have a pdisk that has no associated hdisk.
a. Run diagnostics (using system verification mode) to the pdisk.
b. If you get an SRN, go to Table A-1 on page A-6 and follow the actions
described.
If you do not get an SRN, the disk formatting may be incompatible with the
system (the disk was formatted on a different type of using system).
1) Format the pdisk.
2) Issue the system cfgmgr command
3) Retry the Configuration Verification service aid.
3. If the problem remains, a software error has probably occurred. Call your
support center for assistance.

2-38 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 2010-3

Have the system diagnostics or problem determination procedures given you


an SRN for the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive?
NO Go to “Step 2010-4.”
YES Go to “Service Request Numbers (SRNs)” on page A-3.

Step 2010-4

If the system diagnostics are available, go to “Step 2010-5.”

If the stand-alone diagnostics are available, but the system diagnostics are not
available, run them, then go to “Step 2010-5.”

If the system diagnostics and stand-alone diagnostics are not available, go to “Step
2010-1” on page 2-37.

Step 2010-5

Run the diagnostics in the problem determination mode.


Note: Do not run the advanced diagnostics, because errors are logged on other
using systems that share the same loop.

Did the diagnostics give you an SRN for the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive?
NO Go to “Step 2010-6” on page 2-40.
YES Go to “Service Request Numbers (SRNs)” on page A-3.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-39


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 2010-6

Are all LED's on the drives in a 6 pack off?


NO Go to step “Step 2010-9.”
YES Go to “Step 2010-7.”

Step 2010-7

Are any power cables loose or in need of replacement?


NO Go to “Step 2010-8.”
YES Fix or replace the power cables as required. Go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus
Systems to verify the repair.

Step 2010-8

Replace the backplane. Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM RS/6000


Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems to verify the repair.

Step 2010-9

Is there only one drive with no LED's on?


NO Go to step “Step 2010-10” on page 2-41.
YES Replace the the following FRU's:
1. Backplane
2. Disk drive assembly
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems to verify the repair.

2-40 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Step 2010-10

Is the middle LED on one or more disk drives on a backplane off?


NO Go to step “Step 2010-11.”
YES Replace the the following FRU's:
1. Backplane
2. EPOW cable
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems to verify the repair..

Step 2010-11

Is middle LED in the drive at the end of the backplane flashing?


NO Go to step “Step 2010-8” on page 2-40.
YES Go to step “Step 2010-12” on page 2-42.

Chapter 2. Maintenance Analysis Procedures 2-41


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step 2010-12

Replace the SSA link cable closest to the flashing LED. Did the LED stop flashing?
NO Go to step “Step 2010-13.”
YES Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic
Information for Multiple Bus Systems to verify the repair.

Step 2010-13

Replace the following:


1. Backplane
2. Disk drive with the second LED flashing

Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for


Multiple Bus Systems to verify the repair.

2-42 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index

The Error Code to FRU Index lists error symptoms and possible causes. The most
likely cause is listed first. Use this index to help you decide which FRUs to replace
when servicing the system.

If the codes in the following tables indicate a device which is present more than once
in the system unit, a location code is needed to specify which device generated the
error. Go to “Step 1020-4” on page 2-11 to display the System Management
Services error log and obtain a location code. Location code descriptions can be
found under “Location Codes” on page 3-46.

Notes:
1. If more than eight digits are displayed in the operator panel, use only the first
eight digits to find the error in the tables. The digits that display beyond the first
eight digits are location codes that can assist you in diagnosing the problem. See
“Location Codes” on page 3-46.
2. Licensed programs frequently rely on network configuration, and system
information stored on the VPD on the operator panel. If the MAPs indicate that
the Operator Panel should be replaced, swap the VPD from the old operator
panel to the new one. If the old VPD module has to be replaced call technical
support for recovery instructions. If recovery is not possible, notify the system
owner that new keys for licensed programs may be required.
3. If a network adapter, or the I/O board is replaced, the network administrator must
be notified so that the client IP addresses used by the server can be changed. In
addition, the operating system configuration of the network controller may need
to be changed in order to enable system startup. Also check to ensure that any
client or server that addresses this system is updated.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-17 unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Firmware/POST Error Codes

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-17

If you replace FRUs and the problem is corrected, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in the IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems

Table 3-1 (Page 1 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.


Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
203w0xyz Ÿ w=loop number Check Cables, then Remote I/O.
Ÿ x=0 missing link
Ÿ y=port number
Ÿ z=c for interconnect z=b missing
link back z=E RIO de-configured
20A80xxx Remote initial program load (RIPL)
error.
20A80000 Insufficient information to boot. Verify the IP address.
20A80001 Client IP address is already in use by Change IP address.
other network device.
20A80002 Cannot get gateway IP address. Refer to “Checkpoints” on page 3-29
table using code E174.
20A80003 Cannot get server hardware address. Refer to “Checkpoints” on page 3-29
table using code E174.
20A80004 Bootp failed. 1. Refer to “E1xx Code Boot
Problems” on page 3-44 for
general considerations.
2. Turn off then on, and retry the boot
operation.
3. Verify Boot List by using the
Firmware SMS Multiboot menus.
4. Verify the network conection
(network could be down).
5. Have network administrator verify
the server configuration for this
client.
20A80005 File transmission (TFTP) failed. Check network connection, try again.
20D00xxx Unknown/Unrecognized device
20D0000F Self-test failed on device, no Check the System Management
error/location code information Services error log entry (described in
available. “Step 1020-4” on page 2-11) for this
error code. The location code (if
present) in the error log entry should
identify the location of the failing
device.

3-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 2 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20D00010 Self-test failed on device, can't locate Contact you service support
package. representative for assistance.
20D00011 Cannot determine Machine Model. The Machine Model is part of the
System Vital Product Data. Perform
corrective actions listed for errors
2BA00050, 2BA00051.
20E00xxx Security
20E00000 Power on Password entry error. The password has been entered
incorrectly.
Retry installing the password.
20E00001 Privileged-access password entry error. The password has been entered
incorrectly.
Retry installing the password.
20E00002 Privileged-access password jumper not The privileged-access password jumper
enabled. is not in the correct position for
password initial entry.
Consult the system's User's Guide for
jumper location and position.
20E00003 Power on Password must be set for Unattended mode requires the setting
Unattended mode. of the Power On password before it is
enabled.
20E00004 Battery drained or needs replacement. 1. Replace battery.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00005 EEPROM locked. 1. Turn off, then turn on system unit.
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
20E00008 CMOS corrupted or tampering evident, Check your machine for evidence of
CMOS initialized. tampering.
If no tampering evident:
1. Replace battery, restore NVRAM
data (passwords, startup data).
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00009 Invalid password entered - system The password has been entered
locked. incorrectly 3 times.
Turn off, then turn on the system unit,
then enter the password correctly.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 3 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20E0000A EEPROM lock problem. If for privileged-access password
install, is jumper in correct position?
Consult the system's User's Guide for
jumper location and position.
1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E0000B EEPROM write problem 1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E0000C EEPROM read problem. 1. Turn off, turn on system unit.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
20E00017 Cold boot needed for password entry. Turn off, turn on system unit.
20EE0xxx Informational
20EE0003 IP parameter requires 3 dots "." Enter valid IP parameter.
Example: 000.000.000.000
20EE0004 Invalid IP parameter. Enter valid (numeric) IP parameter.
Example: 000.000.000.000
20EE0005 Invalid IP parameter (>255) Enter valid (numeric) IP parameter in
the range of 0 to 255.
Example: 255.192.002.000
20EE0006 No SCSI controllers present The I/O board should always have (at
least) 2 integrated PCI SCSI
controllers; replace the I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
20EE0007 Keyboard not found 1. Plug in keyboard.
2. Replace I/O board, (See notes on
3-1.)
20EE0008 No configurable adapters found in the This warning occurs when the selected
system. SMS function cannot locate any
devices/adapters supported by the
function. If a supported device is
installed:
1. Replace the device or adapter.
2. Replace I/O board, (See notes on
3-1.)
20EE0009 Unable to communicate with the 1. Replace the Service Processor.
Service processor.
2. Replace I/O board, (See notes on
3-1.)
3. Replace System Board.

3-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 4 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
20EE000A Pointer to the operating system found Values normally found in non-volatile
in non-volatile storage. storage that point to the location of an
Operating System were not found.
This can happen for two reasons,
either your installed Operating System
doesn't support storing the values or
some event occurred that caused the
system to lose non-volatile storage
information (drainage or replacement of
the battery). If you are running AIX,
this information can be reconstructed
by running the bootlist command
specifying the device that the Operating
System is installed on. Please refer to
your AIX documentation for the exact
syntax and usage of the bootlist
command.
In order to boot the Operating System
so that the above mentioned values
can be reconstructed,power the system
down and power it back up again, this
should cause the system to look for the
Operating System in the devices
contained in the custom boot list or in
the default boot list, depending on the
condition of the system. If this is not
successful, modify the Boot Sequence
(also known as boot list) to include
devices that are known to contain a
copy of the Operating System. This
can be accomplished by using the
System Management Services Menus.
For example, select a hard disk known
to have a copy of the Operating
System as the first and only device in
the boot sequence (boot list) and
attempt to boot again.
20EE000B The system was not able to find an Modify the Boot Sequence (also known
operating system on the device list that as boot list) to include devices that are
was attempted. known to contain a copy of the
Operating System. This can be
accomplished by using the System
Management Services Menus. For
example, select a hard disk known to
have a copy of the Operating System
as the first and only device in the boot
sequence (boot list) and attempt to
boot again.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 5 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
21A000xxx SCSI Device Errors Notes:
1. Before replacing any system
components:
a. Ensure that the controller and
each device on the SCSI bus is
assigned a unique SCSI ID.
b. Ensure SCSI bus is properly
terminated.
c. Ensure SCSI signal and power
cables are securely connected
and not damaged.
2. The location code information is
required to identify the ID of SCSI
device failures as well as to
indicate the location of the
controller to which the device is
attached.
21A00001 Test Unit Ready Failed - hardware Refer to the notes in error code
error. 21A000xxx.
1. Replace the SCSI device.
2. Replace the SCSI cable.
3. Replace the SCSI controller.
21A00002 Test Unit Ready Failed - sense data Refer to the notes in error code
available. 21A000xxx.
1. Replace the Media (Removable
media devices).
2. Replace the SCSI device.
21A00003 Send Diagnostic Failed. Refer to the notes in error code
21A000xxx.
Replace the SCSI device.
21A00004 Send Diagnostic Failed - DevOfl cmd. Refer to the notes in error code
21A000xxx.
Replace the SCSI device.
21E00xxx SCSI Tape Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21ED0xxx SCSI Changer. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21EE0xxx Other SCSI device type. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21F00xxx SCSI CD-ROM. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
21F20xxx SCSI Read/Write Optical. Refer to 21A00xxx for a description
and repair action for the xxx value.
25000000 Memory Controller Failed. Replace the System Board.

3-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 6 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25010xxx Flash Update Problem
25010000 No diskette in drive. Insert diskette containing firmware
image.
25010001 Diskette seek error. 1. Retry function.
2. Replace diskette drive.
3. Replace diskette cable.
4. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010002 Diskette in drive does not contain an Insert diskette with firmware update file.
*.IMG file.
25010003 Cannot open OPENPROM package. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010004 Cannot find OPENPROM node. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010006 System id does not match image Make sure correct firmware update
system id. diskette is being used with this system.
25010007 Image has bad CRC. Replace firmware updated diskette.
25010008 Flash is write protected, update 1. Turn off, turn on system unit and
cancelled. retry.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25010009 Flash module is unsupported or not Make sure correct firmware update
recognized. diskette is being used with this system.
2501000A Flash write protected. 1. Turn off, turn on system unit, retry.
2. Replace I/O board. (See notes on
3-1.)
25A0xxx0 L2 Cache controller problem. 1. Replace the CPU card.
2. Replace the System board.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
25A0xxx1 L2 Cache controller problem. 1. Replace the CPU card.
2. Replace the System board.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
25A1xxx1 L2 SRAM failure Replace the CPU card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 7 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25A80xxx NVRAM problems NVRAM problem resolution:
1. Errors reported against NVRAM
can be caused by low Battery
voltage and (more rarely) power
outages that occur during normal
system usage. With the exception
of the 25A80000 error, these errors
are warnings that the NVRAM data
content had to be re-established
and do not require any FRU
replacement unless the error is
persistent. When one of these
errors occurs, any system
customization (eg. boot device list)
information has been lost, the
system may need to be
re-configured.
2. If the error is persistent, replace
the battery.
3. If the error is persistent after
battery replacement, or the error
code is 25A80000, replace the I/O
board. (See notes on 3-1.)
25A80000 Initialization failed, device test failed. Refer to Action under error code
25A80xxx.
25A80001 Init-nvram invoked, ALL of NVRAM Refer to Action under error code
initialized. 25A80xxx.
25A80002 Init-nvram invoked, some data Refer to Action under error code
partitions may have been preserved. 25A80xxx.
25A80011 Data corruption detected, ALL of Refer to Action under error code
NVRAM initialized. 25A80xxx.
25A80012 Data corruption detected, some data Refer to Action under error code
partitions may have been preserved. 25A80xxx.
25A80100 NVRAM data validation check failed. Turn off, turn on system unit and retry
the operation before replacing any
system component. Refer to Action
under error code 25A80xxx.
25A80201 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
saving configuration variable. 25A80xxx.
25A80202 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
writing error log entry. 25A80xxx.
25A80203 Unable to expand target partition while Refer to Action under error code
writing VPD data. 25A80xxx.

3-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 8 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25A80210 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - name Refer to Action under error code
contains a null character. 25A80xxx.
25A80211 Setenv/$Setenv parameter error - value Refer to Action under error code
contains a null character. 25A80xxx.
25AA0xxx EEPROM problems. EEPROM problem resolution:
1. Ensure that the EEPROM Security
jumper is in the correct position if
doing a privileged-access password
install.
2. Retry the operation.
3. If retries do not solve the problem,
replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
25AA0000 Unable to unlock EEPROM. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0001 Read-Recv error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0002 Read-Trans error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0003 Write-enable error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0004 Write-recv error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0005 Write-disable error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0006 Write-Trans error. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25AA0007 Unable to lock EEPROM. Refer to Action under error code
25AA0xxx.
25B00001 No memory modules detected in either 1. Reseat any installed memory
memory card 1 or 2. card(s) and retry.
2. Reseat any installed memory
modules on the installed memory
cards.
3. Replace Memory Card(s).
25Cyyxxx Memory Card problems. See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-26
for definition of "yy".
Use the location code obtained from
the SMS Error Log utility (described in
MAP Step 1020-4) to identify which
memory module (or memory module
pair) the error is reported against.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 9 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
25Cyy001 Memory module is not supported. Replace unsupported memory module.
Note:
Memory module must be replaced with
a supported type memory module. If
an unsupported memory module is
replaced the same unsupported type,
the error does not go away.
There may be 2 memory module
related memory errors reported to
indicate a memory module pair. One
of the 2 indicated memory modules
may be good, when replacing memory
replace 1 memory module at a time,
not both.
See “Memory PD Bits” on page 3-26
for definition of "yy".
25Cyy002 Memory module fails memory test. 1. Replace memory module.
2. Replace memory card.
3. Replace the System Board.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-26 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy003 PD bits are mis-matched or missing 1. Make sure both memory modules
one memory module. in the pair are the same type.
2. Replace System Board.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-26 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy004 Memory modules are disabled. Remove this unused memory module.
25Cyy005 Memory module failed address test. 1. Replace memory module.
2. Replace memory card.
3. Replace System Board.
4. Replace CPU Card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-26 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy006 Memory module failed inter-extent test. 1. Replace system board.
2. Replace CPU card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-26 for definition of "yy".
25Cyy007 Memory module failed extent access 1. Replace system board.
test. 2. Replace CPU card.
See “Memory PD Bits” on
page 3-26 for definition of "yy".

3-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 10 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
28030xxx RTC errors 1. Errors reported against the Real
Time Clock (RTC) can be caused
by low battery voltage and (more
rarely) power outages that occur
during normal system usage.
These errors are warnings that the
RTC data content needs to be
re-established and do not require
any FRU replacement unless the
error is persistent. When one of
these errors occurs, the Power On
Password and Time and Date
information has been lost.
Ÿ To set/restore a Power On
Password, use the SMS utility.
Ÿ To set/restore the Time and
Date, use the Operating
System facility.
2. If the error is persistent, replace
the battery.
3. If the error is persistent after
battery replacement, replace the
I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
28030001 RTC initialization required- RTC not Refer to Action under error code
updating, corrected. 28030xxx.
28030002 Bad time/date values
1. Set the time and date.
2. Refer to Action under error code
28030xxx.
29000002 Keyboard/Mouse controller failed Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
self-test. 3-1.)
29A00003 Keyboard not present/detected. 1. Keyboard
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
29A00004 Keyboard stuck key test failed. 1. Keyboard
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
29B00004 Mouse not present/detected. 1. Mouse
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2B200402 Unsupported Processor. CPU Card.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 11 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2B2xxx22 Processor disabled. CPU Card.
Where xxx indicates the processor type
as follows:
000 166 Mhz 1 or 2 way
Processor card
200 166 Mhz 1 or 2 way
Processor card
211 Down level VPD. Contact
service person.
251 166 Mhz 1 way Processor
card
261 166 Mhz 2 way Processor
card
451 332 Mhz 1 way Processor
card
461 332 Mhz 2 way Processor
card
2B2xxx31 Processor failed. CPU Card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
2B2xxx42 Unsupported processor type. CPU Card.
See error code 2B2xxx22 for xxx
definitions.
2BA00xxx Service Processor
2BA00000 Service processor POST failure. 1. Unplug the system power cable
and wait until the system power
indicator remains off and the
operator panel is blank.
2. Plug the system power cable back
in and retry the operation.
3. Replace the service processor
card.
4. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00012 Service processor reports self-test 1. Unplug the system power cable
failure. and wait until the system power
indicator remains off and the
operator panel is blank.
2. Plug the system power cable back
in and retry the operation.
3. Replace the service processor
card.
4. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00013 Service processor reports bad NVRAM 1. If problem persists, replace battery.
CRC. 2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)

3-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 12 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00014 Service processor reports bad service Use service processor firmware
processor firmware. diskette to re-program firmware.
2BA00017 Service processor reports bad or low 1. Replace the battery.
battery. 2. Replace the service processor
card.
3. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00018 EPOW test failure. 1. Replace the service processor.
2. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2BA00019 IRQ13 test failure. 1. Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.)
2. Replace the service processor
card.
2BA00024 Service processor reports bad Power Use the System Firmware diskette to
Controller firmware. re-program the System firmware.
2BA00040 Service processor reports Service 1. Use the Service Processor
Processor VPD module not present. Firmware diskette to re-program
the Service Processor firmware.
2. Replace the Service Processor
card.
2BA00041 Service processor VPD is corrupted. 1. Use the service processor firmware
diskette to re-program the service
processor firmware.
2. Replace the service processor
card.
2BA00050 Service processor reports system Replace the operator panel control
operator panel VPD module not present assembly. (See notes on 3-1.)
or not recognizeable.
Note: Swap the old VPD module from
the old operator panel control assembly
to the new one.
2BA00051 System operator panel VPD data Replace the operator panel control
corrupted. assembly. (See notes on 3-1.)
Note: Swap the old VPD module from
the old operator panel control assembly
to the new one.
2BA00060 Service processor reports I/O board Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
VPD module not present. 3-1.)
2BA00061 Service processor reports I/O board Replace the I/O board. (See notes on
VPD data corrupted. 3-1.)
2BA00062 Service processor reports system board Replace the system board.
VPD module not present.
2BA00063 Service processor reports system board Replace the system board.
VPD data corrupted.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 13 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00064 Service processor reports PCI riser Replace the PCI riser card.
card VPD module not present.
2BA00065 Service processor reports PCI riser Replace the PCI riser card.
card VPD data corrupted.
2BA00066 Service processor reports PCI Replace the PCI expansion card.
expansion card VPD module not
present.
2BA00067 Service processor reports PCI Replace the PCI expansion card.
expansion card VPD data corrupted.
2BA00070 Service processor reports CPU card Replace the CPU card(s).
VPD module not present.
2BA00071 VPD data corrupted for CPU in slot 0. Replace the CPU card in slot 0.
2BA00073 VPD data corrupted for CPU in slot 1. Replace the CPU card in slot 1.
2BA00100 Service processor firmware recovery 1. Check diskette media write protect
information could not be written to tab.
diskette. 2. Replace the diskette drive.
2BA00101 Service processor is not installed, 1. Install the service processor.
update cancelled. 2. Retry operation.
2BA00102 No service processor update diskette in Insert the diskette.
drive.
2BA00103 Service processor firmware update file 1. Obtain new service processor
is corrupted, update cancelled. firmware diskette.
2. Retry operation.
2BA00104 Service processor firmware update file 1. Obtain new level of service
is the same level as the service processor firmware.
processor firmware, update cancelled. 2. Retry operation.
2BA00200 Service processor firmware update Service processor firmware update
error occurred, update not completed. error recovery procedure:
Error occurred during service processor 1. Turn the system Off.
flash write operation. 2. Unplug power cable and then plug
power cable back in.
3. Turn the system On.
4. Retry operation. If problem
persists, replace service processor.
2BA00201 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while reading service
processor CRC.
2BA00202 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while verifying service
processor CRC.

3-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 14 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00203 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while reading new
service processor CRC after updating
service processor firmware.
2BA00204 Service processor firmware update See error code 2BA00200 for recovery
error occurred, update not completed. procedure.
Error occurred while calculate CRC
write.
2BA00300 Service Processor reports Slow Fan 1. Replace Fan 1.
number 1 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00301 Service Processor reports Slow Fan 1. Replace Fan 2.
number 2. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00302 Service Processor reports Slow Fan 1. Replace Fan 3.
number 3. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00303 Service Processor reports Slow Fan 1. Replace Fan 4.
number 4. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00309 Service Processor reports Generic 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Cooling Alert. to the system.
2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00310 Service Processor reports CPU Over 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Temperature Alert. to the system.
2. If the problem persists, replace
CPU Card
2BA00311 Service Processor reports IO Over 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Temperature Alert. to the system.
2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00312 Service Processor reports Memory 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Over Temperature Alert. to the system.
2. Replace Memory Card.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 15 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00313 Service Processor reports Generic 1. Replace Power Supply.
Power Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00314 Service Processor reports 5V Over 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00315 Service Processor reports 5V Under 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00316 Service Processor reports 3.3V Over 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00317 Service Processor reports 3.3V Under 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00318 Service Processor reports 2.5V Over 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00319 Service Processor reports 2.5V Under 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00320 Service Processor reports +12V Over 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00321 Service Processor reports +12V Under 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00322 Service Processor reports -12V Over 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00323 Service Processor reports -12V Under 1. Replace Power Supply.
Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00324 Service Processor reports 5V Standby 1. Replace Power Supply.
Over Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00325 Service Processor reports 5V Standby 1. Replace Power Supply.
Under Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00326 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card 5V Over Voltage Alert. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)

3-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 16 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00327 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card 5V Under Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00328 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card 3.3V Over Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00329 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card 3.3V Under Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00330 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card +12V Over Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00331 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card +12V Under Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00332 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card -12V Over Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00333 Service Processor reports PCI 1. Replace Power Supply.
Expansion Card -12V Under Voltage 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
Alert. 3-1.)
2BA00334 Service Processor reports Generic 1. Replace Power Supply.
Slow Shutdown request. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00335 Service Processor reports CPU Critical 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Over Temperature Slow Shutdown to the system.
request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning).
3. If problem persists, replace CPU
Card.
2BA00336 Service Processor reports IO Critical 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Over Temperature Slow Shutdown to the system.
request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning).
3. If problem persists, replace I/O
Board. (See notes on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-17


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 17 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00337 Service Processor reports Memory 1. Check for cool air flow obstructions
Critical Over Temperature Slow to the system.
Shutdown request. 2. Check fans for obstructions that
prevent them from normal
operation (example: a cable caught
in the fan preventing it from
spinning)
3. If problem persists, replace
Memory Card.
2BA00338 Service Processor reports Generic Fast 1. Replace Power Supply.
Shutdown request. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00340 Service Processor reports Locked fan - 1. Replace fan 1.
Fast Shutdown request fan number 1. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00341 Service Processor reports Locked fan - 1. Replace fan 2.
Fast Shutdown request fan number 2. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00342 Service Processor reports Locked fan - 1. Replace fan 3.
Fast Shutdown request fan number 3. 2. If problem persists, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00343 Service Processor reports Locked fan - 1. Replace fan 4.
Fast Shutdown request fan number 4. 2. If problem persi.ts, replace Power
Supply.
3. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00350 Service Processor reports Generic 1. Replace Power Supply.
Immediate Shutdown request. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00351 Service Processor reports Generic AC 1. Replace Power Supply.
power loss EPOW. 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00352 Service Processor reports Loss of AC 1. Replace Power Supply.
power (outlet). 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
2BA00353 Service Processor reports Loss of AC 1. Replace Power Supply.
power (power button). 2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)

3-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 18 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
2BA00399 Service Processor reports Unsupported 1. Check EPOW cabling on SCSI or
value in EPOW. SSA Backplanes.
2. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on
3-1.)
40100005 A loss of system power detected. Possible main power loss. If not,
replace power supply.
40100007 Immediate shutdown. Possible main power loss. If not,
replace power supply.
40110001 Power Supply fail. 1. Check power cable to P2
connector on I/O Board.
2. Power supply.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4. Service processor.
40110002 Voltage not detected on either Replace power supply.
processor card.
40110003 Voltage not detected on one processor Replace CPU card.
card. (If the system is running, refer to
the AIX error log to find out which
processor card is failing. If the system
is not running, refer to the Service
Processor error log.)
40111002 An unknown power problem detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Service processor.
40111022 A high 5.0 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. CPU card.
40111032 A high 3.3 voltage reading detected. 1. CPU card.
2. Power supply.
40111042 A high 2.5 voltage reading detected. 1. CPU card.
2. Power supply.
40111052 A high +12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111062 A high −12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111082 A low 5.0 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board
40111092 A low 3.3 voltage reading detected. 1. CPU card.
2. Power supply.
401110A2 A low +5 standby voltage reading 1. CPU card.
detected. 2. Power supply.
401110B2 A low +12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-19


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 19 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
401110C2 A low −12 voltage reading detected. 1. Power supply.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
40111101 Power good signal low on either Replace failing processor card
processor card 1 or processor card 2.
(If the system is running, refer to the
AIX error log to find out which
processor card is failing. If the system
is not running, refer to the Service
Processor error log.)
40111102 Wrong processor cards plugged into 1. Remove cards
the system. 2. Verify part numbers
3. Install valid cards
40200001 An unknown cooling problem detected. Cooling problem; check system fans.
40200021 A CPU temperature warning detected. Over temperature on CPU card.
40200023 A critical CPU temperature condition Critical temperature on CPU card.
detected.
40200031 An I/O board temperature warning Over temperature on I/O board.
detected.
40200033 A critical I/O board temperature Critical temperature on I/O board.
condition detected.
40200041 A memory temperature warning Over temperature on the Memory Card.
detected.
40200043 A critical memory temperature condition Critical temperature on the Memory
detected. Card.
40210011 A slow fan detected. Check:
1. Room operating temperature.
2. System fans.
40A00000 System firmware IPL failure. 1. Surveillance mode control is from
the Service Processor (SP) Menus.
2. Verify that the system firmware
supports Service Processor
surveillance.
3. CPU card.
4. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
5. Service processor.
6. If the problem persists, call the
support center for assistance.

3-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 20 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
40B00000 The operating system surveillance 1. Surveillance mode control is from
interval exceeded. the Service Processor(SP) Menus.
2. Verify that the Operating System
(OS) Heartbeat Utility is installed
and has been activated.
3. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
OS from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the error log.
4. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
5. Service processor.
6. If the problem persists, call the
support center for assistance.
40B00100 Surveillance timeout on CPU 1. 1. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
CPU from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the Service Processor error
log.
2. Replace the CPU card.
40B00101 Surveillance timeout on CPU 2. 1. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
CPU from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the Service Processor error
log.
2. Replace the CPU card.
40B00102 Surveillance timeout on CPU 3. 1. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
CPU from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the Service Processor error
log.
2. Replace the CPU card.
40B00103 Surveillance timeout on CPU 4. 1. Check for errors or unusual
conditions that might prevent the
CPU from reporting Heartbeat
messages; such as system dump,
machine check or checkstop error.
Review the Service Processor error
log.
2. Replace the CPU card.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 21 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
40D00003 An unknown slow shutdown Critical cooling problem. Check to
commanded. ensure the the temperature is in the
ambient range
40D00004 An unknown fast shutdown Locked fan failure detected. Make sure
commanded. all fans are operating normally.
4B200054 The CPU cards are not compatible with 1. Remove cards
each other (i.e. one is a 166MHz and 2. Verify part numbers
the other is a 332MHz) 3. Install valid cards
4B200055 No CPU card in first slot. 1. If only one processor card is used,
it must be in slot #1.
2. If two processor cards are being
used, replace the card in slot #1.
4B201000 Checkstop 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. CPU Card.
3. System Board.
4. PCI Adapter.
5. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4B2xxx10 Machine Check 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. Refer to map 1540 in the system
unit's Service Guide.
4B201020 TEA Error Refer to map 1540 in the system unit's
Service Guide.

3-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 22 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx01 Checkstop - Slot 1 Fail 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. CPU Card in Slot 1
3. System Board
4B2xxx02 Checkstop - Slot 2 Fail 1. Attempt to reboot the system in
Service Mode, this preserves the
AIX error log. If the reboot fails,
attempt to reboot from the
CD-ROM. If the reboot is
successful, run Diagnostics in
Problem Determination mode to
determine the cause of the failure.
Otherwise continue.
2. CPU Card in Slot 2
3. System Board
4B2xxx41 ABIST fail 1. CPU Card in Slot 1.
2. I/O board
4B2xxx42 ABIST fail 1. CPU Card in Slot 2.
2. I/O board

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-23


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-1 (Page 23 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4B2xxx43 Service Processor reports JTAG fail 1. Service Processor is the least likely
failure, but it is the tester in this
case. Replace the Service
Processor to assure true failure
indication. If the failure disappears,
the Service Processor was bad.
Otherwise, reinstall the old Service
Processor.
2. Remove the CPU(s) and the
System Board. If the failure
returns, replace the I/O planar.
(See notes on 3-1.) Otherwise,
continue.
3. Install the System Board WITHOUT
the CPU(s). If the failure returns,
replace the System Board.
Otherwise, continue.
4. Install the CPU Card in slot 1. If
the failure returns, replace that
CPU Card. Otherwise, continue.
5. Install the CPU Card in slot 2 (if
there was one). If the failure
returns, replace that CPU Card.
Otherwise, continue.
6. If the failure is still absent, the
problem was a bad connection,
and you have reseated the
possible connections.
4BA00000 The system support controller detects 1. Replace the service processor.
the service processor, but cannot 2. Replace the I/O board.
establish communication. The system
halts.
4BA00001 The system support controller cannot Replace the service processor.
detect the service processor.
4BA80013 NVRAM Refer to map 1540 in the system unit's
Service Guide.
4BA10001 SSC sram fail Refer to map 1540 in the system unit's
Service Guide.
4BA10002 SSC sram fail Refer to map 1540 in the system unit's
Service Guide.
4BA10003 Service Processor Fail. Replace Service Processor.
4BA10004 Service Processor Firmware Fail. Restore or update the Service
Processor Flash EPROM.

3-24 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-1 (Page 24 of 24). Firmware Error Codes.
Error Code Description Action / Possible Failing FRU
4BA10005 IòC Path Fail. 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. CPU Card.
3. System Board.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-25


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory PD Bits

The following table expands the firmware error code 25Cyyxxx on page 3-9, where
yy is the PD values in the table below. Use these values to identify the type of
memory that generated the error.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to &hdref refid=1540.
unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

Table 3-2. Memory Module PD bits


PD Clock Cycle Parity/
value Size (nsecs) ECC
58 32MB 10 ECC
38 128MB 10 ECC

Note: Memory modules must be installed in pairs.

3-26 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table

This table is used to locate defective FRUs within the I/O board PCI and ISA buses.
The table indicates which devices should be tested for each SRN. For this
procedure, if possible, diagnostics are run on the I/O board bus devices with all
adapters removed from the failing bus. If a failure is detected on this system with all
adapters removed from the failing bus, the I/O board is the isolated FRU. If a failure
is not detected, the adapters are added back one at a time, to their original slot
location, and the configuration is tested until a failure is detected. The failure is then
isolated to the failing FRU.

If a failure has not been detected and all the FRUs have been tested call your
technical service support person for assistance.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-27


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-3. Bus SRN to FRU Reference Table
SRN Bus Possible Failing Device and AIX Associated
Identification Location Code FRU
9CC-100 PCI Bus 00 Internal SCSI port 1 (10-60) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Internal Ethernet port (10-80) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Device installed in I/O Slot 3P (10-68 Adapter
to 10-6F)
Device installed in I/O Slot 4P (10-70 Adapter
to 10-77)
Device installed in I/O Slot 5P (10-78 Adapter
to 10-7F)
9CC-101 PCI Bus 01 Device installed in I/O Slot 1P (20-58 Adapter
to 20-5F)
Device installed in I/O Slot 2P (20-60 Adapter
to 20-67)
9CC-102 PCI Bus 02 Internal/External SCSI port 2 (30-58) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Device installed in I/O Slot 6P (30-60 Adapter
to 30-67)
Device installed in I/O Slot 7P (30-68 Adapter
to 30-6F)
Device installed in I/O Slot 8P (30-70 Adapter
to 30-77)
Device installed in I/O Slot 9P (30-78 Adapter
to 30-7F)
651-730 ISA Bus Diskette Drive port/device I/O board. (See
(01-D1-00-00) notes on 3-1.)
Parallel port/device (01-R1) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Serial ports (1-3)/device (01-S1 to I/O board. (See
01-S3) notes on 3-1.)
Mouse port/device (01-K1-01-00) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Keyboard port/device (01-K1-00-00) I/O board. (See
notes on 3-1.)
Device installed in I/O Slot 8I (01-01 Adapter
or 01-02)
Device installed in I/O Slot 9I (01-01 Adapter
or 01-02)

3-28 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Checkpoints

Checkpoints are intended to let users and service personal know what the server is
doing, with some detail, as it initializes. These checkpoints are not intended to be
error indicators, but in some cases a server could hang at one of the checkpoints
without displaying an 8-character error code. It is for these hang conditions, only, that
any action should be taken with respect to checkpoints. The most appropriate action
is included with each checkpoint.

Before taking actions listed with a checkpoint, it is a good idea to look for better
symptoms in the Service Processor error log. See Service Processor System
Information Menu.

SP Checkpoints

Service Processor checkpoints are in the range E010 to E0FF. The message OK
indicates successful service processor testing and initialization. Firmware checkpoints
are listed in “Firmware Checkpoints” on page 3-32.
Note: Go to MAP 1540 for any of the following conditions:
Ÿ A four-digit code in the range of E001 through EFFF displays on the operator
panal but is not listed in the checkpoint table.
Ÿ A four-digit code displays in the checkpoint table, but does not contain a repair
action or FRU listing.
Ÿ All of the FRUs listed in the repair action have been replaced and the problem
has not been corrected.

Table 3-4 (Page 1 of 3). SP Checkpoints.


Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E000 System Support Controller begins See the note on 3-29.
operation. This is an informational
checkpoint.
E010 Starting SP. self-tests 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E011 SP self-tests completed successfully NA
E012 Begin to set up Service Processor Service Processor.
heaps
E020 Configuring CMOS 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Service Processor.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-29


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-4 (Page 2 of 3). SP Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E021 Configuring NVRAM 1. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. Service Processor.
E030 Beginning to build I2C resources 1. Service Processor.
2. CPU Card.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E031 Finished building I2C resources 1. Service Processor.
2. CPU Card.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E040 Starting serial port tests 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E042 Configuring serial port 1 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E043 Configuring serial port 2 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E044 Preparing to set serial port line 1. Service Processor.
speed
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E045 Preparing to initialize serial port 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E060 Preparing to auto power-on (AC 1. Service Processor.
restored)
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E061 Preparing to auto power-on (Timer) 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E070 Configuring modem 1. Modem.
2. Service Processor.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4. CPU Card.

3-30 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-4 (Page 3 of 3). SP Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E072 Preparing to call home 1. Modem.
2. Service Processor.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4. CPU Card.
E075 Entering SP menus 1. Service Processor.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E076 Leaving SP menus; attempting to 1. Service Processor.
disconnect modems
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. CPU Card.
E0A0 Beginning Bring-Up Phase 1. Service Processor.
2. CPU Card.
3. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
E0B0 Starting CPU BIST 1. CPU Card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Service Processor.
E0C0 Starting X5 BIST 1. CPU Card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Service Processor.
E0E0 Pulling CPU out of reset 1. CPU Card.
2. I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
3. Service Processor.
E0E1 Pull CPU out of reset: okay 1. CPU Card.
2. I/O board.
3. System board. (See notes on
3-1.)
4. Service Processor.
OK SP Ready Waiting for Power-On None. Normal operation.
STBY SP Ready. System was shutdown This condition can be requested by
by the operating system and is still a privileged system user with no
powered on. faults. See Service Processor error
log for possible operating system
fault indications.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-31


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Firmware Checkpoints

Firmware uses progress codes (checkpoints) in the range of E1xx to EFFF. These
checkpoints occur during system startup and maybe be useful in diagnosing certain
problems. Service Processor checkpoints are listed in “SP Checkpoints” on
page 3-29.

If you replace FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on page 2-17 unless otherwise indicated in the tables.

Table 3-5 (Page 1 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.


Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E100 Reserved See the note on 3-29.
E101 Video enabled, extended memory See the note on 3-29.
test
E102 Firmware restart See the note on 3-29.
E103 Set memory refresh (composite img) See the note on 3-29.
E104 Set memory refresh (recovery block) See the note on 3-29.
E105 Transfer control to Operating See “E1xx Code Boot Problems” on
System (normal boot). page 3-44.
E108 Run recovery block base memory See the note on 3-29.
(test 2K), set stack
E109 Copy CRC verification code to RAM See the note on 3-29.
E10A Turn on cache See the note on 3-29.
E10B Flush cache See the note on 3-29.
E10C Jump to CRC verification code in See the note on 3-29.
RAM
E10D Compute composite image CRC See the note on 3-29.
E10E Jump back to ROM See the note on 3-29.
E10F Transfer control to Open Firmware See the note on 3-29.
E110 Turn off cache, Check if composite See the note on 3-29.
image CRC is valid
E111 GOOD CRC - jump to composite See the note on 3-29.
image
E112 BAD CRC - initialize base memory, See the note on 3-29.
stack
E113 BAD CRC - copy uncompressed See the note on 3-29.
recovery block code to RAM
E114 BAD CRC - jump to code in RAM See the note on 3-29.
E115 BAD CRC - turn on cache See the note on 3-29.

3-32 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-5 (Page 2 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E116 BAD CRC - copy recovery block See the note on 3-29.
data section to RAM
E117 BAD CRC - Invalidate and flush See the note on 3-29.
cache, set TOC
E118 BAD CRC - branch to high level See the note on 3-29.
recovery control routine.
E119 Initialize base memory, stack See the note on 3-29.
E11A Copy uncompressed recovery block See the note on 3-29.
code to RAM
E11B Jump to code in RAM See the note on 3-29.
E11C Turn on cache See the note on 3-29.
E11D Copy recovery block data section to See the note on 3-29.
RAM
E11E Invalidate and flush cache, set TOC See the note on 3-29.
E11F Branch to high level control routine. See the note on 3-29.
E120 Initialize I/O and early memory block See the note on 3-29.
E121 Initialize S.P. See the note on 3-29.
E122 No memory detected (system 1. Memory Modules
lockup) Note: Disk drive light is on 2. Memory Card
continuously. 3. System Board
4. See the note on 3-29.
E123 No memory module found in socket. See the note on 3-29.
E124 Disable defective memory bank See the note on 3-29.
E125 Clear PCI devices command reg, go See the note on 3-29.
forth
E126 Check valid image - start See the note on 3-29.
E127 Check valid image - successful See the note on 3-29.
E128 Disable interrupts, set int vectors for See the note on 3-29.
O.F.
E129 Validate target RAM address See the note on 3-29.
E12A Copy ROM to RAM, flush cache See the note on 3-29.
E12B Set MP operational parameters See the note on 3-29.
E12C Set MP cpu node characteristics See the note on 3-29.
E12D Park secondary processors in See the note on 3-29.
parking lot
E12E Primary processor sync See the note on 3-29.
E12F Unexpected return from Open See the note on 3-29.
Firmware (system lockup)

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-33


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-5 (Page 3 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E130 Build device tree See the note on 3-29.
E131 Create ROOT node See the note on 3-29.
E132 Create cpus node See the note on 3-29.
E133 Create L2 Cache node See the note on 3-29.
E134 Create memory node See the note on 3-29.
E135 Create memory module node See the note on 3-29.
E136 Test memory See the note on 3-29.
E137 Create openprom node See the note on 3-29.
E138 Create options node See the note on 3-29.
E139 Create aliases node and system See the note on 3-29.
aliases
E13A Create packages node See the note on 3-29.
E140 PReP style load See the note on 3-29.
E149 Create boot mgr node See the note on 3-29.
E14C Create terminal-emulator node See the note on 3-29.
E14D Load boot image See “E1xx Code Boot Problems” on
page 3-44.
E14E Create client interface See the note on 3-29.
node/directory
E14F NVRAM validation, config variable See the note on 3-29.
token generation
E150 Create host (primary) PCI controller See the note on 3-29.
node
E151 Probing primary PCI bus 1. PCI Adapters
2. I/O board.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
See the note on 3-29.
E152 Probe for adapter FCODE, evaluate 1. PCI Adapters
if present 2. I/O board.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
See the note on 3-29.
E153 End adapter FCODE, See the note on 3-29.
probe/evaluation
E154 Create PCI bridge node See the note on 3-29.

3-34 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-5 (Page 4 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E155 Probe PCI bridge secondary bus 1. PCI Adapters
2. I/O board.
If a network adapter or I\O board is
replaced, see 3-1.
See the note on 3-29.
E156 Create PCI ethernet node See the note on 3-29.
E15A Create 64 bit host (primary) PCI See the note on 3-29.
controller node
E15B Transferring control to Operating See “E1xx Code Boot Problems” on
System (service mode boot) page 3-44.
E15C Probe primary 64 bit PCI bus See the note on 3-29.
E15D Create host PCI controller node See the note on 3-29.
E15E Create MPIC node See the note on 3-29.
E15F Adapter VPD probe See the note on 3-29.
E160 CPU node VPD creation See the note on 3-29.
E161 Root node VPD creation See the note on 3-29.
E162 SP node VPD creation See the note on 3-29.
E164 Create PCI graphics node (P9) See the note on 3-29.
E168 Create PCI graphics node (S3) See the note on 3-29.
E16C GTX100P Subsystem Open request. See the note on 3-29.
E16D GTX100P Planar not detected or See the note on 3-29.
failed diagnostics.
E16E GTX100P Subsystem Open See the note on 3-29.
successful.
E16F GTX100P Close Subsystem. See the note on 3-29.
E170 Start of PCI Bus Probe See the note on 3-29.
E171 Executing PCI-Delay function See the note on 3-29.
E174 Establish host connection Refer to “E1xx Code Boot
Problems” on page 3-44 for general
considerations.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-35


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-5 (Page 5 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E175 BootP request Refer to “E1xx Code Boot
Problems” on page 3-44 for general
considerations.
1. Turn off then on, and retry the
boot operation.
2. Verify the network connection
(network could be down).
3. Have network administrator
verify the server configuration
for this client.
E176 TFTP file transfer See the note on 3-29.
E177 Transfer failure due to TFTP error See the note on 3-29.
condition
E178 Create PCI token ring node See the note on 3-29.
E180 SP Command setup See the note on 3-29.
E183 SP Post See the note on 3-29.
E190 Create ISA node See the note on 3-29.
E193 Initialize Super I/O. See the note on 3-29.
E196 Probe ISA bus. See the note on 3-29.
E19B Create Service Processor node. See the note on 3-29.
E19C Create tablet node. See the note on 3-29.
E19D Create nvram node. See the note on 3-29.
E19E Real time clock (RTC) creation and Refer to error code 28030xxx in
initialization. “Firmware/POST Error Codes” on
page 3-2.
E19F Create eeprom node. See the note on 3-29.
E1AD See description of checkpoint See the note on 3-29.
E1DE.
E1B0 Create lpt node. See the note on 3-29.
E1B1 Create serial node. See the note on 3-29.
E1B2 Create audio node. See the note on 3-29.
E1B3 Create 8042 node. See the note on 3-29.
E1B6 Probe for (ISA) keyboard. See the note on 3-29.
E1BA Enable L2 cache. See the note on 3-29.
E1BB Set cache parms for burst. See the note on 3-29.
E1BC Set cache parms for 512KB. See the note on 3-29.
E1BD Probe for (ISA) mouse. See the note on 3-29.
E1BE Create op-panel node. See the note on 3-29.

3-36 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-5 (Page 6 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1BF Create pwr-mgmt node. See the note on 3-29.
E1C0 Create ISA ethernet node. See the note on 3-29.
E1C5 Create ISA interrupt controller (pic) See the note on 3-29.
node.
E1C6 Create dma node. See the note on 3-29.
E1D0 Create PCI SCSI node. See the note on 3-29.
E1D3 Create (* wildcard *) SCSI block See the note on 3-29.
device node (SD).
E1D4 Create (* wildcard *) SCSI byte See the note on 3-29.
device node (ST).
E1DB Create floppy controller (FDC) node. See the note on 3-29.
E1DC Dynamic console selection. If a console is attached but nothing
is displayed on it, follow the steps
associated with "All display
problems" in the Entry MAP tables.
If selection screen(s) can be seen
on the terminals and the appropriate
key on the input device associated
with the disired display or terminal
is pressed, within 60 seconds, but
there is no response to the
keystroke:
1. If selecting the console with a
keyboard attached to the
system, replace the keyboard.
If replacing the keyboard does
not fix the problem, replace the
I/O board. (See notes on 3-1.)
2. If selecting the console with an
ASCII terminal, suspect the
ASCII terminal. Use the
Problem Determination
Procedures for the terminal.
Replace the I/O board if these
procedures do not reveal a
problem. Note: Terminal
settings should be set to:
Ÿ 9600 Baud
Ÿ No Parity
Ÿ 8 Data bits
Ÿ 1 Stop bit

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-37


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-5 (Page 7 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1DD Early processor exception I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-29.
E1DE Alternating pattern of E1DE and 1. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
E1AD is used to indicate a Default
See the note on 3-29.
Catch condition before the firmware
"checkpoint" word is available.
E1DF Create diskette drive (disk) node See the note on 3-29.
E1E0 Program flash See the note on 3-29.
E1E1 Flash update complete See the note on 3-29.
E1E2 Initialize System I/O See the note on 3-29.
E1E3 PReP boot image initialization. See the note on 3-29.
E1E4 Initialize Super I/O with default See the note on 3-29.
values.
E1E5 XCOFF boot image initialization. See the note on 3-29.
E1E6 Set up early memory allocation See the note on 3-29.
heap.
E1E7 PE boot image initialization. See the note on 3-29.
E1E8 Initialize primary diskette drive See the note on 3-29.
(polled mode).
E1E9 ELF boot image initialization. See the note on 3-29.
E1EA Firmware flash corrupted, load from Ensure that the diskette installed
diskette. contains recovery image appropriate
for this system unit.
The System Management Services
recovery procedure for the flash
EEPROM should be executed. See
“Update” on page 5-22.
If the diskette is installed with the
correct recovery image, then
suspect:
1. Diskette
2. Diskette drive
3. Diskette cable
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-29.

3-38 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-5 (Page 8 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1EB Verify flash EPROM recovery Ensure that the diskette installed
image. contains recovery image appropriate
for this system unit.
The System Management Services
recovery procedure for the flash
EEPROM should be executed. See
“Update” on page 5-22.
If the diskette is installed with the
correct recovery image, then
suspect:
1. Diskette
2. Diskette drive
3. Diskette cable
4. I/O board (See notes on 3-1.)
See the note on 3-29.
E1EC Get recovery image entry point See the note on 3-29.
E1ED Invalidate instruction cache See the note on 3-29.
E1EE Jump to composite image See the note on 3-29.
E1EF Erase flash See the note on 3-29.
E1F0 Start O.B.E. See the note on 3-29.
E1F1 Begin self-test sequence on boot See the note on 3-29.
device(s)
E1F2 Power-On Password prompt. Prompt should be visible on the
system console.
If a console is attached but nothing
is displayed on it, go to the “Entry
MAP” on page 2-1 with the
symptom "All display problems."
E1F3 Privileged-Access Password prompt. Prompt should be visible on the
system console.
If a console is attached but nothing
is displayed on it, go to the “Entry
MAP” on page 2-1 with the
symptom "All display problems."
E1F5 Build boot device list. See the note on 3-29.
E1F6 Determine boot device sequence. See the note on 3-29.
E1F7 No boot image located. See the note on 3-29.
E1FB Scan SCSI bus for attached See the note on 3-29.
devices.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-39


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table 3-5 (Page 9 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E1FD Default Catch The operator panel will alternate
between the code E1FD and
another Exxx code, where Exxx is
the point at which the error
occurred. If the Exxx is not listed in
this table, go to “MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration” on
page 2-17.
E201 Setup PHB BARC addresses. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E202 Initialize PHB registers and PHB's Replace the I/O board (See notes
PCI configuration registers. on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E203 Look for PCI to ISA bridge. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E204 Setup ISA bridge. PCI config. Replace the I/O board (See notes
registers and initialize on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E206 Check for 50MHz device on PCI 1. Replace the I/O board (See
Bus in Slots 1P or 2P. notes on 3-1.)
2. I/O Adapters in PCI slots 1P or
2P.
3. See the note on 3-29.
E207 Setup Data gather mode and Replace the I/O board (See notes
64/32-bit mode on PCG. on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E208 Assign bus number on PCG. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E209 Assign PCI I/O addresses on PCI. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E20A Assign PCI I/O addresses on PCG Replace the I/O board. (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E20B Check MCERs stuck at fault. 1. Replace the System Board.
See the note on 3-29.
2. If the problem persists, go to
“MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-17.
E20C Testing L2 cache. Replace the CPU card (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E211 IPL ROS CRC checking. Replace the I/O board (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.
E212 Processor POST. Replace the CPU card (See notes
on 3-1.) See the note on 3-29.

3-40 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table 3-5 (Page 10 of 10). Firmware Checkpoints.
Checkpoint Description Action/
Possible Failing FRU
E213 Initial memory configuration. 1. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.)
2. Replace the System Board.
See the note on 3-29.
E214 Memory test. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-29.
E216 Copy ROS into RAM. Setup Replace the memory card (See
Translation and C environment. notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-29.
E220 Final memory configuration. Go to “MAP 1540: Minimum
Configuration” on page 2-17.
E299 Start C code execution. See the note on 3-29.
E3xx Memory test See “Memory Test Hang Problem”
on page 3-42.
E440 Validate NVRAM, initialize partitions 1. Verify that the system and
as needed. Service Processor firmware
levels are at the current release
levels, update as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-29.
E441 Generate /options node NVRAM 1. Verify that the system and
configuration variable properties. Service Processor firmware
levels are at the current release
levels, update as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-29.
E442 Validate NVRAM partitions. 1. Verify that the system and
Service Processor firmware
levels are at the current release
levels, update as necessary.
2. Replace the memory card (See
notes on 3-1.) See the note on
3-29.
E443 Generate NVRAM configuration Suspect a system firmware problem
variable dictionary words. if this problem persists. Verify that
the system firmware is at the
current release level, update as
necessary. See the note on 3-29.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-41


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory Test Hang Problem

General Memory Information: Memory Card cards can be installed in either


slot (or both) on the System Board, there is no requirement that one be installed
before the other.

It is perfectly acceptable for there to be 2 partially populated Memory Cards, the first
one does not have to be fully populated before memory on the 2nd Memory Card is
usable.

Memory Card memory DIMMs, on the other hand, must be installed in matched (size
and speed) pairs. Refer to the “Removal and Replacement Procedures” for “Memory
Modules” on page 6-26 for labeling of the Memory Card and instructions on module
removal and installation (do not, however, replace the covers as directed while
troubleshooting this problem). A single memory DIMM pair may be installed in
module slots 1 and 2 (not slots 1 and 3). A second memory DIMM pair could be
installed in module slots 5 and 6 (slots 3 and 4 do not have to be populated first).
Along these same lines, there is no requirement that memory DIMM slots 1 and 2 be
populated before another slot pair.

Problem resolution steps: This section attempts to trouble shoot a problem


during the memory testing where the system hangs before an error code can be
displayed on the Operator Panel.
1. Power down the system
2. Remove and re-install any installed Memory Card(s), power the system up. If
the system no longer stops at an E3xx code, re-seating the Memory Card(s) has
corrected the problem.
3. Attempt to isolate the problem to a specific Memory Card.
a. If there is only 1 Memory Card installed, tag the card as suspect bad and
skip to step 4 on page 3-43.
b. Remove one of the 2 Memory Cards, tag the card as suspect bad and Power
the system up. If the system no longer stops at an E3xx code, skip to step
3d.
c. Power down the system, remove the installed Memory Card and install the
Memory Card removed in step 3b. Move the suspect bad tag from the
installed Memory Card to the one just removed, and power the system up. If
the system stops at an E3xx code, remove the suspect bad tag and skip to
step 7 on page 3-44, if the system does not stop at an E3xx code, skip to
step 4 on page 3-43.
d. Power down the system, remove the installed Memory Card and install the
Memory Card removed in step 3b (tagged as suspect bad). Power the
system up. If the system stops at an E3xx code again, skip to step 4 on
page 3-43.

3-42 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


e. Remove the suspect bad tag, re-install the 2nd Memory Card and power the
system up. If the system no longer stops at an E3xx code, re-seating the
Memory Cards (again) has corrected the problem. If the system stops at an
E3xx code again, skip to step 7 on page 3-44.
4. Attempt to isolate the problem to a specific memory DIMM pair on the Memory
Card tagged as suspect bad:
a. Power the system down.
b. Remove all installed memory DIMMs from the suspect bad Memory Card
except one pair. Record the original positions of any memory DIMMs
removed so that when instructed to re-install them they can be installed in
their original position.
c. Power the system up.
d. If the system no longer stops at an E3xx code, skip to step 4g.
e. Replace the memory DIMM pair left installed in step 4b, and tag the removed
memory DIMM pair as suspect bad.
f. Power the system up. If the system stops at an E3xx code, skip to step 6 on
page 3-44.
g. Power down the system
h. If there are more memory DIMM pairs to be re-installed on the suspect bad
Memory Card, install another memory DIMM pair in their original positions on
the Memory Card, and continue with step 4i.
If there are no more memory DIMM pairs to be re-installed, you either have a
suspect bad memory DIMM pair or simply reseating the memory DIMMs on
the Memory Card card has corrected the problem. If you have a suspect
bad memory DIMM pair, continue with step 5.
i. Power the system up.
j. If the system does not stop at an E3xx code, continue at step 4g.
k. If the system has stopped at an E3xx code again, replace the memory DIMM
pair that was just re-installed and tag the removed memory DIMM pair as
suspect bad.
l. Power the system up. If the system again stops at an E3xx code, continue
with step 6 on page 3-44. If the system does not stop at an E3xx code,
continue with step 4g.
5. Determine which of the suspect bad memory DIMMs is defective (may be both).
For each of the 2 memory DIMMs tagged as suspect bad:
a. Power the system down. Removing the currently installed memory DIMM
first, re-install one of the 2 suspect bad memory DIMMs in its original
position.
b. Power the system up. If the system again stops at an E3xx code, the
memory DIMM tagged suspect bad just installed is defective, replace it with
the memory DIMM removed in step 5a. If the system did not stop at an
E3xx code, remove the suspect bad tag from the memory DIMM just installed
- it is not defective.
Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6. Replace the Memory Card.
7. Replace the System Board.
8. Replace the CPU Card(s).

E1xx Code Boot Problems: Depending on the boot device, a checkpoint may
be displayed on the operator panel for an extended period of time while the boot
image is retrieved from the device. This is particularly true for Tape and Network
boot attempts. If the checkpoint/code is displayed for an extended time there may
be a problem loading the boot image from the device. If booting from CD-ROM or
Tape, watch for “activity” on the drive's LED indicator. A blinking LED means that
the loading of either the boot image or additional information required by the
operating system being booted is still in progress.

For network boot attempts, if the system is not connected to an active network or if
the target server is inaccessible (this can also result from incorrect IP parameters
being supplied), the system still attempts to boot and because time-out durations are
necessarily long to accommodate retries, the system may appear to be hung.
1. Restart the system and get to the Firmware SMS utilities. In the utilities check:
Ÿ Is the intended boot device correctly specified in the boot sequence?
– If the intended boot device is not correctly identified in the boot
sequence, add it to the boot sequence using the SMS menus.
Ÿ For network boot attempts:
– Are the IP parameters correct?
– Attempt to “Ping” the target server using the SMS “Ping” utility.
2. If the checkpoint E105 or E15B is displayed for an extended time, there may be
a problem with the integrity of the boot image.
Ÿ Try to boot and run standalone diagnostics against the system, particularly
against the intended boot device. If the diagnostics are successful, it may be
necessary to perform an operating system specific recovery process, or
reinstall the operating system.
3. If attempting to boot from a Hard disk, CD-ROM, or Tape drive:
a. Try a different CD/Tape (unless booting from Hard disk).
b. Verify proper SCSI bus termination.
c. Replace SCSI cable.
d. It is possible that another attached SCSI device is causing the problem.
Disconnect any other SCSI devices attached to the same controller as the
one the boot device is attached to and retry the boot operation. If this is
successful, one of the devices removed is causing the problem, re-attach
devices one by one and retry the boot operation until the problem recurs and
replace the device that caused the problem.
e. Replace SCSI adapter (if drive is attached to a card rather than the I/O
Board).
f. Replace SCSI drive.
3-44 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


g. It is possible that another installed adapter is causing the problem.
Remove all installed adapters except the one the boot device is attached to,
try to boot the standalone diagnostics from a CD-ROM drive attached to the
scsi controller on the I/O Board, and run the diagnostics against the system.
If this is successful, re-install adapters (and attached devices as applicable)
that were removed, one at a time, and run the standalone diagnostics
against the system.
h. Replace backplane.
i. Replace I/O Board. (See notes on 3-1.)
4. If attempting to boot from a Network controller:
a. Power Off then On and retry the boot operation
b. Verify the network connection (network could be down)
c. Verify that IP parameters are correct
d. Try to “Ping” the target server
e. Have network administrator verify the server configuration for this client
f. Replace network cable
g. Replace network adapter (unless trying to boot using the ethernet controller
on the I/O Board)
h. It is possible that another installed adapter is causing the problem.
Remove all installed adapters except the one you are trying to boot, and try
to boot the standalone diagnostics from a CD-ROM drive attached to the scsi
controller on the I/O Board. If this is successful, run the diagnostics against
the system, particularly against the target network boot controller/adapter.
If this is successful, re-install adapters (and attached devices as applicable)
that were removed, one at a time, and run the diagnostics against the
system. If the diagnostics fails, replace the last installed FRU.
i. Replace I/O Board (if not replaced in previous step). (See notes on 3-1.)
5. If you replaced the indicated FRUs and the problem is still not corrected, or the
above descriptions did not address your particular situation, go to "MAP 1540:
Minimum Configuration".

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-45


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Location Codes

This system unit uses Physical Location Codes in conjunction with AIX Location
Codes to provide mapping of the failing field replaceable units. The location codes
are produced by the system unit's firmware and AIX.

Physical Location Codes


Physical location codes provide a mapping of logical functions in a platform (or
expansion sites for logical functions, such as connectors or ports) to their specific
locations within the physical structure of the platform.

Location Code Format

The format for the location code is an alphanumeric string of variable length,
consisting of a series of location identifiers, separated by the standard dash (-) or
slash (/) character. The series is hierarchical; that is, each location identifier in the
string is a physical child of the one preceding it.
Ÿ The - (dash) separator character represents a normal structural relationship
where the child is a separate physical package and it plugs into (or is connected
to) the parent. For example, P1-C1 is a CPU card (C1) plugged into a planar
(P1), or P1-M1 is a memory card (M1) plugged into a planar (P1).
Ÿ The / (slash) separator character separates the base location code of a function
from any extended location information. A group of logical devices can have the
same base location code because they are all on the same physical package,
but may require extended location information to describe the connectors they
support. For example, P2/S1 describes the location of the serial port 1 controller
and its connector (S1), which is located on planar P2 (its base location code),
but the / indicates that further devices can be connected to it at the external S1
serial connector. The keyboard controller and its connector likewise have
location code P2/K1, which means they have the same base location code (P2)
as serial port 1, but a different external connector. In contrast, the location code
P2-K1 actually points to the device connected to connector K1; that is, the
keyboard. The location code P2/Z1 indicates an integrated SCSI controller which
drives connector Z1, while location codes of P2-Z1-... point to the actual SCSI
bus and devices.

Each location identifier consists of one alpha prefix character that identifies a location
type, and a decimal integer number (typically one or two digits) that identifies a
specific instance of this location type. Certain location types may also support
secondary sub-locations, which are indicated by appending a period (".") character
and a sub-location instance number.

3-46 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specifically, the format of a location code is defined as follows:

pn[.n][- or /]pn[.n][- or /]...

Where p is a defined alpha location type prefix, n is a location instance number, and
[.n] is a sub-location instance number (where applicable). Sub-location notation is
used only for location types which have clearly defined and limited expansion sites;
for example, memory SIMMs slots on a memory card. Primarily, the [.n] sub-location
notation is intended for use as an abbreviation of the location code in cases where:
1. Based on the device structure, the abbreviated sub-location code conveys the
same information in a more concise form than an additional level of location
identifier -- for example:
Ÿ P1-M1.4 (pluggable module 4 on Memory Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than
P1-M1-M4
Ÿ P1-C1.1 (pluggable CPU 1 on CPU Card 1 on Planar 1), rather than
P1-C1-C1
Ÿ P2-Z1-A3.1 (LUN 1 at SCSI ID 3 on integrated SCSI bus 1 from Planar 2),
rather than P2-Z1-A3-A1
2. The sub-location is either a basic physical extension or sub-enclosure of the
base location, but does not represent additional function or connectivity; for
example, a drawer in a rack (U1.2) or a riser card on an I/O board (P2.1).

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-47


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table

3-48 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification

Central Electronics Complex (CEC)

System Planar 00-00 P1


Processor Card 00-00 P1-C1 Processor CPU ID 0x00
1 Connectors and 0x01 (if
J8 and J5 2-way card)
Processor Card 00-00 P1-C2 Processor CPU ID 0x04
2 Connector and 0x05 (if
J9 and J6 2-way card)
Memory Card 1 00-00 P1-M1 Processor
Connector J12
Memory Card 1 00-00 P1-M1.1 Memory Card Extents:
moduleS 1 thru through Sockets 8L,8H,10L,10H,
16 P1-M1.16 J1,J2,J3,J4, 12L,12H,14L,14H
J5,J6,J7,J8 9L,9H,11L,11H,
J9,J10,J11,J12, 13L,13H,15L,15H
J13,J14,J15,J16
Memory Card 2 00-00 P1-M2 Processor
Connector J13
Memory Card 2 00-00 P1-M2.1 Memory Card Extents:
moduleS 1 thru through Sockets 8L,8H,10L,10H,
16 P1-M2.16 J1,J2,J3,J4, 12L,12H,14L,14H
J5,J6,J7,J8 9L,9H,11L,11H,
J9,J10,J11,J12, 13L,13H,15L,15H
J13,J14,J15,J16
I/O board 00-00 P2
FMC card 00-00 P2/X2 Connector J51

Integrated Devices

Diskette Drive 01-D1-00-00 P2-D1 I/O board Base Address


Connector J13 0x0310
Keyboard 01-K1-00-00 P2-K1 I/O board Base Address
Connector J23 0x0060
Mouse 01-K1-01-00 P2-O1 I/O board 0x0060
Connector J27
Diskette Port 01-D1 P2/D1 I/O board 0x03f0
Connector J13
Keyboard Port 01-K1-00 P2/K1 I/O board 0x0060
Connector J23
Mouse Port 01-K1-01 P2/O1 I/O board 0x0060
Connector J27
Serial Port 1 01-S1 P2/S1 I/O board 0x0318
Connector J41

3-50 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification
Serial Port 2 01-S2 P2/S2 I/O board 0x0218
Connector J41
Serial Port 3 01-S3 P2/S3 I/O board 0x0898
Connector J50
Parallel Port 01-R1 P2/R1 I/O board 0x0378
Connector J47
Ethernet Port 10-80 P2/E1 I/O board Host Bridge
Connector ID00, Device 06
J18(TH) or
J21(TP)
SCSI Port 1 10-60 P2/Z1 I/O board Host Bridge
Connector J25 ID00, Device 04
SCSI Port 2 30-58 P2/Z2 I/O board Host Bridge
Connector J11 ID02, Device 06
and J30

Pluggable Adapters

Card in PCI Slot 20-58 to 20-5F P2-I1 I/O board Host Bridge
1P Connector J1 ID01, Device 01
Card in PCI Slot 20-60 to 20-67 P2-I2 I/O board Host Bridge
2P Connector J2 ID01, Device 02
Card in PCI Slot 10-68 to 10-6F P2-I3 I/O board Host Bridge
3P Connector J3 ID00, Device 03
Card in PCI Slot 10-70 to 10-77 P2-I4 I/O board Host Bridge
4P Connector J4 ID00, Device 04
Card in PCI Slot 10-78 to 10-7F P2-I5 I/O board Host Bridge
5P Connector J5 ID00, Device 05
Card in PCI Slot 30-60 to 30-67 P2-I6 I/O board Host Bridge
6P Connector J6 ID02, Device 02
Card in PCI Slot 30-68 to 30-6F P2-I7 I/O board Host Bridge
7P Connector J7 ID02, Device 03
Card in PCI Slot 30-70 to 30-77 P2-I8 I/O board Host Bridge
8P Connector J8P ID02, Device 04
Card in PCI Slot 30-78 to 30-7F P2-I9 I/O board Host Bridge
9P Connector J9P ID02, Device 05
Card in ISA Slot 01-01 or 01-02 P2-I8 I/O board
8I Connector J81
Card in ISA Slot 01-01 or 01-02 P2-I9 I/O board
9I Connector J91

SCSI Devices

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-51


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification
Base CD-ROM 10-60-00-6, 0 P2-Z1-A6 Primary SCSI
(Bay A1) Bus ID 6 (refer
to the note at
the end of this
table)
Media Device in 10-60-00-4, 0 P2-Z1-A4 Primary SCSI
Bay B1 Bus ID 4 (refer
to the note at
the end of this
table)
Media Device in 10-60-00-5, 0 P2-Z1-A5 Primary SCSI
Bay B2 Bus ID 5 (refer
to the note at
the end of this
table)
SCSI Backplane 10-60-00-15, 0 P2-Z1-B2 Primary SCSI
C Bus ID 15
When
connected to
SCSI Port 1
(P2/Z1)
SCSI Backplane 30-58-00-15, 0 P2-Z2-B2 Secondary SCSI
C Bus ID 15
When
connected to
SCSI Port 2
(P2/Z2)
DASD in Bays 10-60-00-G, 0 P2-Z1-B2.1 Primary SCSI
C1 through C6 Where G through B2.6 Bus ID 8
When identifies through 13
connected to Primary SCSI
SCSI Port 1 Bus ID 8
(P2/Z1) through 13
DASD in Bays 30-58-00-G, 0 P2-Z2-B2.1 Secondary SCSI
C1 through C6 Where G through B2.6 Bus ID 8
When identifies through 13
connected to Secondary SCSI
SCSI Port 2 Bus ID 8
(P2/Z2) through 13
SCSI Backplane 30-58-00-15, 0 P2-Z2-B2 Secondary SCSI
D Bus ID 15
When
connected to
SCSI Port 2
(P2/Z2)

3-52 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification
SCSI Backplane AB-CD-00-15, 0 P2-In-Z1-B2 Bus ID 15
D Where AB-CD
When identifies the
connected to adapter's slot
PCI adapter in
slot P2-In
DASD in Bays 30-58-00-G, 0 P2-Z2-B2.1 Backplane Secondary SCSI
D1 through D6 Where G through B2.6 connector J6 Bus ID 8
When identifies through J11 through 13
connected to Secondary SCSI Slots A through
SCSI Port 2 Bus ID 8 F
(P2/Z2) through 13
DASD in Bays AB-CD-00-G, 0 P2-In-Z1-B2.1 Backplane Bus ID 8
D1 through D6 Where AB-CD through B2.6 connector J6 through 13
When identifies the through J11
connected to adapter's slot Slots A through
PCI adapter in and G identifies F
slot P2-In the SCSI Bus ID
8 through 13
SCSI Backplane AB-CD-00-15, 0 P2-In-Z1-B2 Bus ID 15
E Where AB-CD
When identifies the
connected to adapter's slot
PCI adapter in
slot P2-In
DASD in Bays AB-CD-00-G, 0 P2-In-Z1-B2.1 Backplane Bus ID 8
E1 through E6 Where AB-CD through B2.6 connector J6 through 13
When identifies the through J11
connected to adapter's slot Slots A through
PCI adapter in and G identifies F
slot P2-In the SCSI Bus ID
8 through 13

Fans

Fan 1 F1 Fan connector


J12 at I/O Board
Fan 2 F2 Fan connector
J17 at I/O Board
Fan 3 F3 Fan connector
J15 at I/O Board
Fan 4 F4 Fan connector
J19 at I/O Board
Fan 1 P2/F2 Fan connector
Connector J12 at I/O Board
Fan 2 P2/F2 Fan connector
Connector J17 at I/O Board

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-53


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AIX Physical Physical Logical
FRU Name Location Code Location Code Connection Identification
Fan 3 P2/X3 Fan connector
Connector J15 at I/O Board
Fan 4 P2/X4 Fan connector
Connector J19 at I/O Board

Service Processor

Service P2-X1 I/O board


Processor Connector J10

Operator Panel

Operator Panel L1 I/O board


Connector J22A
Operator Panel P2/L1 I/O board
Connector Connector J22A

Power Supply

Power Supply V1 I2C Ad 92, Ch2;


RTAS=9002-0
Note: The SCSI bus ID's are the recommended values. Features installed at the manufacturing site
will correspond to these IDs. Field installations may not comply with these recommendations.

AIX Location Codes

The basic formats of the AIX location codes are:


Ÿ For non-SCSI devices/drives
AB-CD-EF-GH
Ÿ For SCSI devices/drives
AB-CD-EF-G,H

3-54 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For planars, cards, and non-SCSI devices the location code is defined as:
AB-CD-EF-GH
| | | |
| | | Device/FRU/Port ID
| | Connector ID
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus

Ÿ The AB value identifies a bus type or PCI parent bus as assigned by the
firmware.
Ÿ The CD value identifies adapter number, adapter's devfunc number, or physical
location. The devfunc number is defined as the PCI device number times 8, plus
the function number.
Ÿ The EF value identifies a connector.
Ÿ The GH value identifies a port, address, device, or FRU.
Adapters and cards are identified with just AB-CD.

The possible values for AB are:

00 Processor bus
01 ISA bus
02 EISA bus
03 MCA bus
04 PCI bus used in the case where the PCI bus cannot be identified
05 PCMCIA buses
xy For PCI adapters where x is equal to or greater than 1. The x and y are characters in the
range of 0-9, A-H, J-N, P-Z (O, I, and lower case are omitted) and are equal to the parent
bus's ibm, aix-loc Open Firmware Property.

The possible values for CD depend on the adapter/card.

For pluggable PCI adapters/cards, CD is the device's devfunc number (PCI device
number times 8, plus the function number). The C and D are characters in the range
of 0-9, and A-F (hex numbers). This allows the location code to uniquely identify
multiple adapters on individual PCI cards.

For pluggable ISA adapters, CD is equal to the order the ISA cards
defined/configured either by SMIT or the ISA Adapter Configuration Service Aid.

For integrated ISA adapters, CD is equal to a unique code identifying the ISA
adapter. In most cases this is equal to the adapter's physical location code. In cases
where a physical location code is not available, CD will be FF.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-55


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
EF is the connector ID. It is used to identify the adapter's connector that a resource
is attached to.

GH is used to identify a port, device, or FRU. For example:


Ÿ For async devices GH defines the port on the fanout box. The values are 00 to
15.
Ÿ For a diskette drive H defines which diskette drive 1 or 2. G is always 0.
Ÿ For all other devices GH is equal to 00.

For integrated adapter, EF-GH is the same as the definition for a pluggable adapter.
For example, the location code for a diskette drive is 01-D1-00-00. A second
diskette drive is 01-D1-00-01.

For SCSI the location code is defined as:


AB-CD-EF-G,H
| | | | |
| | | | Logical Unit address of the SCSI Device
| | | Control Unit Address of the SCSI Device
| | Connector ID
| devfunc Number, Adapter Number or Physical Location
Bus Type or PCI Parent Bus

Where AB-CD-EF are the same as non-SCSI devices.

G defines the control unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 15 are valid.

H defines the logical unit address of the device. Values of 0 to 255 are valid.

There is also a bus location code that is generated as '00-XXXXXXXX' where


XXXXXXXX is equivalant to the node's unit address.

Examples of physical location codes displayed by AIX are:


Processor Card in slot 1 of planar 1

P1-C1

Memory module in system planar slot 2

P1-M2

Memory module 12 in card in slot 2 of system planar

U1-P1-M2.12

3-56 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Examples of AIX location codes displayed are:
Integrated PCI adapter

10-80 Ethernet
10-60 Integrated SCSI Port 1
30-58 Integrated SCSI Port 2

Pluggable PCI adapters

20-58 to 20-5F Any PCI card in slot 1


20-60 to 20-67 Any PCI card in slot 2
10-68 to 10-6F Any PCI card in slot 3
10-70 to 10-77 Any PCI card in slot 4
10-78 to 10-7F Any PCI card in slot 5
30-60 to 30-67 Any PCI card in slot 6
30-68 to 30-6F Any PCI card in slot 7
30-70 to 30-77 Any PCI card in slot 8
30-78 to 30-7F Any PCI card in slot 9

Integrated ISA adapters

01-D1 Diskette adapter


01-R1 Parallel port adapter
01-S1 Serial port 1 adapter
01-S2 Serial port 2 adapter
01-S3 Serial port 3 adapter
01-K1 Keyboard adapter

Non-integrated ISA adapters

01-01 First ISA card defined/configured


01-02 Second ISA card defined/configured

Device attached to SCSI controller

10-60-00-4,0 Device attached to Integrated SCSI


Port 1

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-57


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SSA Location Code Format

Location codes identify the locations of adapters and devices in the using system
and their attached subsystems and devices. These codes are displayed when the
diagnostic programs isolate a problem. For information about the location codes that
are used by the using system, see the operator guide for the using system.

A B - C D - E F - G H

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ └──── Always ð
│ │ │ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ │ └────── Always ð
│ │ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │ └────────── Always ð
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ └──────────── P = Physical disk drive module
│ │ │ │ L = Logical disk drive
│ │ │ │
│ │ │ └──────────────── Adapter position (number of the slot,
│ │ │ 1 through 8, containing
│ │ │ the SSA adapter)
│ │ │
│ │ └────────────────── System I/O bus identifier
│ │
│ └────────────────────── Always ð

└──────────────────────── Always ð

The location code shows only the position of the SSA adapter in the using system
and the type of device that is attached. Use a service aid to find the location of the
device (disk drive module). For more information, see “SSA Service Aids” on
page 3-64.

3-58 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SSA Loops and Links

The disk drive modules of the system unit are connected through two SSA links to
an SSA adapter that is located in the using system. The disk drive modules, SSA
links, and SSA adapter are configured in loops. Each loop provides a data path that
starts at one connector of the SSA adapter and passes through a link (SSA cable) to
the disk drive modules. The path continues through the disk drive modules, then
returns through another link to a second connector on the SSA adapter.

The SSA Adapter

The system unit can be attached to an SSA adapter. See Figure 3-1. The adapter
card has four SSA connectors that are arranged in two pairs. Connectors A1 and A2
are one pair; connectors B1 and B2 are the other pair. Connectors B1 and B2 are
used on 7025 Model F50, since they support the internal and external SSA cable
options.

Figure 3-1. SSA Adapter Card

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-59


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The SSA links must be configured as loops. The loop is connected to the internal
connectors at the SSA adapter card. These connectors must be a valid pair (that is,
A1 and A2, or B1 and B2); otherwise, the disk drive modules on the loop are not fully
configured, and the diagnostics fail. Operations to all the disk drive modules on a
particular loop can continue if that loop breaks at any one point.

Each pair of connectors has a green light that indicates the operational status of its
related loop:

Status of Light Meaning


Off Both SSA connectors are inactive. If disk drive modules are connected to
these connectors, either those modules are failing, or their SSA links have not
been enabled.
Permanently on Both SSA links are active (normal operating condition).
Slow Flash Only one SSA link is active.

Disk Drive Module Strings

In the system unit, the disk drive modules are arranged in a string of 2 to 6 disk drive
modules. This string has its own two SSA connectors. This string is connected
through an internal SSA cable to a pair of connectors on the SSA adapter to make
an SSA loop. (The SSA cables provide the SSA links.)

Figure 3-2 shows the relationships between the SSA connectors and the disk drive
module string in a system unit.

Figure 3-2. A String of Disk Drive Modules

3-60 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Pdisks, Hdisks, and Disk Drive Module Identification

The physical disk drives (pdisks) in an SSA subsystem can be configured as logical
units (LUNs). A LUN is also known as an hdisk, and can consist of one or more
physical disk drives. An hdisk in an SSA subsystem might, therefore, consist of one
pdisk or several pdisks.

The configuration software also allocates an identification (hdisk and pdisk number)
to each disk drive module during the configuration of the SSA link. The disk drive
modules do not have fixed physical addresses.

The configuration software first recognizes the disk drive module by the
machine-readable serial number that is written on the disk. Then, it assigns an
identification that is related to the position of the disk drive-module in the SSA string.
After configuration, the disk drive module always has the same identification. It can
be moved to any position on the SSA link, but can always be found by the software.

Service actions are always related to physical disk drives. For this reason, errors
that occur on SSA disk drives are always logged against the physical disk drive
(pdisk).

The numeric identifier of pdisks, hdisks, and disk drive module slots of the system
unit are not related to each other. For example, pdisk1 is not necessarily installed in
slot 1 of the 6-pack.

The disk drive module serial number, on the label on the front of the carrier, is also
displayed by the service aids. It is the last eight digits of the drives IEEE SSA
unique ID, which is stored on the drives electronics card.

Rules for SSA Loops

The following are rules for SSA loops.


Ÿ The SSA loop must be connected to the internal pair of connectors on the SSA
adapter.
Ÿ Only one pair of adapter connectors can be connected to a particular SSA loop.
Ÿ A maximum of 18 disk drive modules can be connected in a particular SSA loop.
Ÿ A maximum of three dummy disk drive modules can be connected next to each
other in a particular SSA loop.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-61


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Loops and Data Paths

All devices that are attached to an SSA adapter card are connected through SSA
links. See Figure 3-2 on page 3-60. The SSA links are configured as loops. Data
and commands to a particular device pass through all other devices on the link
between the adapter and the target device.

Data can travel in either direction around a loop. The adapter can, therefore, access
the disk drive modules through two data paths. The using system cannot detect
which data path is being used.

If a disk drive module fails, or is turned off, the loop is broken, and one of the data
paths to a particular module is no longer available. The disk drive modules on the
loop continue to work, but an error is reported to the using system.

Figure 3-3 shows that disk drive module in slot 3 has failed. The disk drive modules
in slots 1 and 2 can communicate with the using system only through connector A1
of the SSA adapter. The disk drive modules in slots 4, 5, and 6 can communicate
only through connector A2 of the SSA adapter.

Figure 3-3. Disk Drive Module in Slot 3 Has Failed

3-62 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


If two or more disk drive modules are turned off, fail, or are removed from the loop,
some modules might become isolated from the SSA adapter.

Figure 3-4 shows that disk drive modules in slots 2 and 4 have failed. The disk
drive module in slot 1 can communicate with the using system only through
connector A1 of the SSA adapter. The disk drive module in slots 5 and 6 can
communicate with the using system only through connector A2 of the SSA adapter.
The disk drive module in slot 3 is isolated from the SSA adapter.

Figure 3-4. Disk Drive Modules in Slots 2 and 4 Have Failed

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-63


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SSA Service Aids

SSA service aids help you service the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive. This section
describes those service aids, and tells how to use them.

Attention: Do not run the service aids from more than one using system at a time;
otherwise, unexpected results might occur.

The SSA service aids are:


Set Service Mode This service aid enables you to determine the
location of a particular disk drive module on the
SSA link and to remove that module from the link.
Link Verification This service aid tells you the operational status of
an SSA link.
Configuration Verification This service aid lets you determine the relationship
between physical and logical disk drives.
Format Disk This service aid formats an SSA disk drive module.
Certify Disk This service aid verifies that all the data on a disk
drive can be read correctly.

Before you use the service aids, ensure that you are familiar with the principles of
SSA links and physical disk drives (pdisks). If you are not familiar with these
principles, first read “SSA Loops and Links” on page 3-59.

3-64 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The Identify Function

The identify function can be accessed from any of the service aids.

This function enables you to determine the location of a particular disk drive module
that you want to identify but do not want to remove from the system unit. The
identify function causes the check light of the disk drive module to flash for
identification (1 second on, 1 second off), but has no effect on the normal operation
of the disk drive module. You can use the identify function on any number of disk
drive modules at the same time.

Instructions displayed by the service aids tell you when you can select the identify
function.
Note: You cannot use the identify function on a device that is in reserved status.

Starting the SSA Service Aids

To start the SSA service aids:


1. Start the using-system diagnostics (see the Common Diagnostics Information
Manual), and go to DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
2. Follow the instructions to select FUNCTION SELECTION.
3. Select SERVICE AIDS from the Function Select menu.
4. Select SSA SERVICE AIDS from the Service Aids menu.
The SSA Service Aids menu is displayed.
┌────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ │
│ Set Service Mode │
│ Link Verification │
│ Configuration Verification │
│ Format Disk │
│ Certify Disk │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-65


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Note: In some configurations of the using-system console:
Esc and 0 = Exit
Esc and 3 = Cancel
In such configurations, however, the displayed instructions for the
function keys remain the same as those shown in the screen above.
5. Select the service aid that you require, then go to the relevant instructions in this
chapter:
“Set Service Mode Service Aid” on page 3-67
“Link Verification Service Aid” on page 3-73
“Configuration Verification Service Aid” on page 3-77
“Format Disk Service Aid” on page 3-79
“Certify Disk Service Aid” on page 3-81

3-66 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Set Service Mode Service Aid

The Set Service Mode service aid enables you to determine the location of a
particular disk drive module and to remove that module from the system unit. It
causes the check light of that disk drive module to come on for identification, and it
stops all SSA link activity through the module. Only one disk drive module at a time
can be in the service mode.

Before using this service aid, you must make the selected disk drive module
unavailable to the using system; otherwise, an error occurs.

SSA disk drive modules can be maintained concurrently; that is, they can be
removed, installed, and tested on an SSA link while the other modules on the link
continue to work normally. If a disk drive module has its check light on, you can
remove that module from the SSA link without taking any special actions.

If a disk drive module does not have its check light on, the SSA link that passes
through it might still be active, even though the disk drive module itself might not be
working. You must put that module into the service mode before you remove it from
the SSA link.

If you leave the Set Service Mode service aid, the service mode is reset.

To use the Set Service Mode service aid:


1. Select SET SERVICE MODE from the SSA Service Aids menu (see “Starting the
SSA Service Aids” on page 3-65). A list of physical disk drives (pdisks) is
displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 33333333 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk4 55555555 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk6 77777777 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-67


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The columns of information displayed on the screen have the following
meanings:

pdisk0 through pdisk8 Physical disk drive resource identifiers.


11111111 through 99999999 Serial numbers of the physical disk drive modules. The
actual serial number of a disk drive module is shown on
the front of the disk drive module.
00-04-P See “SSA Location Code Format” on page 3-58.
2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive Descriptions of the disk drive modules.

3-68 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Select the pdisk that you want to identify or put into Service Mode (for example,
pdisk3). The following display appears with details of the disk drive module that
you have just selected.
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │
│ │
│ pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ + Set or Reset Identify. │
│ Select this option to set or reset the Identify indicator │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ > Set or Reset Service Mode. │
│ Select this option to set or reset Service Mode │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-69


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Select either the service mode or the identify function. (For this example,
assume that you have selected the service mode function.) The list of pdisks is
displayed again, and the disk drive module that you selected is marked by a >,
which shows that the module is in the service mode.
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 33333333 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ > pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk4 55555555 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk6 77777777 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Notes:
a. You can select only one disk drive module at a time.
b. If you select the service mode function, and the selected disk drive module is
not in a closed loop (see “SSA Loops and Links” on page 3-59), your
selection fails and an error message is displayed. Use the Link Verification
service aid to identify any open-link problems before trying to reselect the
service mode function.
c. If you select the service mode function, and a file system is mounted on the
selected disk drive module, your selection fails. Use the Configuration
Verification service aid to determine which hdisk must have its file system
unmounted before you can select the service mode function.
d. If the check light of the disk drive module that you have put into the service
mode does not come on, and if you are not sure of the location of that
module, use the identify function to help you find the disk drive module (see
“The Identify Function” on page 3-65).

3-70 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Select a second disk drive module, if required (for example, pdisk5). The
following display appears:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │
│ │
│ > pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ + Set or Reset Identify. │
│ Select this option to set or reset the Identify indicator │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ > Set or Reset Service Mode. │
│ Select this option to set or reset Service Mode │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-71


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Select either the service mode or the identify function. If the original disk drive
module is to remain in service mode, you can select only the identify function
now. (Only one disk drive module at a time can be in the service mode.) The
list of pdisks appears again. The pdisk that is in identify mode is identified by a
+.
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2382 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SET SERVICE MODE 8ð2381 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 33333333 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ > pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk4 55555555 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ + pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk6 77777777 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

6. Identify other disk drive modules in the same way, if required.

3-72 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Link Verification Service Aid

The Link Verification service aid helps you determine:


Ÿ Where an SSA link has been broken
Ÿ The status of the disk drive modules on that SSA link
Ÿ The location of a power fault that has been detected by the disk drive modules
on that SSA link

To use the Link Verification service aid:


1. Select Link Verification from the SSA Service Aids menu (see “Starting the SSA
Service Aids” on page 3-65). The Link Verification adapter menu is displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2385 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ ssað ðð-ð3 SSA Adapter │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA Adapter │
│ ssa2 ðð-ð6 SSA Adapter │
│ ssa3 ðð-ð7 SSA Adapter │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

2. Select the adapter that you want to test.


The columns of information displayed on the screen have the following
meanings:

ssa0 through ssa3 Adapter resource identifiers.


00-03 through 00-07 Adapter location codes. These codes specify the
location of the SSA adapter in the using system.
SSA Adapter Descriptions of the adapters.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-73


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. When you have selected an adapter, a list is displayed showing the status of all
the disk drive modules that are attached to the adapter:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2385 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2386 │
│ │
│ SSA Link Verification for: │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA Adapter │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port │
│ │
│ A1 A2 B1 B2 Status │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ð 7 Good │
│ pdisk1 22222222 1 6 Good │
│ pdisk2 33333333 2 5 Good │
│ pdisk3 44444444 3 4 Good │
│ pdisk4 55555555 4 3 Good │
│ pdisk5 66666666 5 2 Good │
│ pdisk6 77777777 6 1 Good │
│ pdisk7 88888888 7 ð Good │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ð 1ð Good │
│ pdisk9 nnnnnnnn 1 9 Good │
│ {MORE} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

The columns of information displayed on the screen have the following


meanings:

pdisk0 through pdisk9 Physical disk drive resource identifiers.


11111111 through 99999999 Serial numbers of the physical disk drive modules. The
actual serial number of a disk drive module is shown on
the front of the disk drive module.
A1 A2 B1 B2 Adapter connector number (see “The SSA Adapter” on
page 3-59).
Status Statuses are:
Good The disk drive module is working
correctly.
Failed The disk drive module has failed.
Power The disk drive module has detected a
loss of power.
Reserved The disk drive module is used by another
using system.

An SSA link must be configured in a loop around which data can travel in either
direction. The loop is broken if a cable fails or is removed, or if a disk drive
module fails. Because each disk drive module on the loop can be accessed

3-74 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


from either direction, the broken loop does not prevent access to any data,
unless that data is on the failed disk drive module. If the loop is broken between
two disk drive modules, the ready lights on those modules flash to show that only
one SSA path is active. Also, the Link Verification service aid shows that only
one path is available to each disk drive module on the broken loop.
You can find the physical location of any disk drive module on the link by using
the identify function (see “The Identify Function” on page 3-65).
Notes:
a. In the lists of physical disk drives (pdisks) that are displayed by the service
aids, you might see:
????? Question marks show where an SSA loop is broken. No
information is available about any devices that are beyond this
point.
Asterisks indicate an unconfigured device. That device might be:
Ÿ Another SSA adapter that is in the same using system or in a
different using system.
Ÿ An SSA device that is in the SSA network, but whose type is
not known. Such a condition can occur if, for example,
devices are added to the network, but the cfgmgr command
is not run to configure those devices into the using system.
For example:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2386 │
│ │
│ SSA Link Verification for: │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA ADAPTER │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port │
│ │
│ A1 A2 B1 B2 Status │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ð Good │
│ pdisk1 22222222 1 Good │
│ ????? │
│ pdisk3 44444444 4 Good │
│ pdisk4 55555555 3 Good │
│ pdisk5 66666666 2 Good │
│ pdisk6 77777777 1 Good │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ð Good │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ð 3 Good │
│ pdisk9 1ððððððð 1 2 Good │
│ {MORE} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Note that the missing disk drive module (pdisk2) is represented by a line of
question marks.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-75


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
b. If you have just made changes to or have just turned on the system unit, you
might need to wait up to 30 seconds before detailed information about the
SSA network becomes available to the service aids.
4. When you have solved a problem, press F3 (Esc and 3 on some consoles) to
leave the display; then press Enter to reselect it. The display shows the new
status of the SSA links.

3-76 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Configuration Verification Service Aid

The Configuration Verification service aid enables you to determine the relationship
between SSA logical units (hdisks) and SSA physical disk drives (pdisks). It also
displays the connection information and operational status of the disk drives.
Note: User applications communicate with the hdisks; error data is logged against
the pdisks.

To use the Configuration Verification service aid:


1. Select Configuration Verification from the SSA Service Aids menu to display a list
of pdisks and hdisks (see “Starting the SSA Service Aids” on page 3-65).
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION 8ð239ð │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 22222222 ðð-ð3-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 33333333 ðð-ð5-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 44444444 ðð-ð7-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ hdisk3 22222222 ðð-ð3-L SSA Logical Disk Drive │
│ hdisk4 33333333 ðð-ð5-L SSA Logical Disk Drive │
│ hdisk5 44444444 ðð-ð7-L SSA Logical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-77


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. Select the hdisk or pdisk that you want to test.
3. If you select an hdisk, a list of pdisks is displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION 8ð239ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION 8ð2391 │
│ │
│ hdisk3 22222222 ðð-ð3-L SSA Logical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port SSA_Addr Status │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 22222222 ðð-ð2 A1 5 Good │
│ ðð-ð2 A2 5 Good │
│ ðð-ð3 A1 1ð Good │
│ ðð-ð3 A2 ð Good │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

If you select a pdisk, a list of hdisks is displayed:


┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION 8ð239ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION 8ð2392 │
│ │
│ pdiskð 22222222 ðð-ð3-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ │
│ hdisk3 22222222 ðð-ð3-L SSA Logical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Note: If you select the hdisk from this screen, the hdisk configuration is
displayed.

3-78 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Format Disk Service Aid

The Format Disk service aid formats SSA disk drive modules.

Attention: Formatting a disk drive module destroys all the data on that module.
Use this procedure only when instructed to do so by the service procedures.

To use the Format Disk service aid:


1. Select Format Disk from the SSA Service Aids menu (see “Starting the SSA
Service Aids” on page 3-65). A list of pdisks is displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ FORMAT DISK 8ð2395 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 33333333 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk4 55555555 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk6 77777777 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-79


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. Select the pdisk that you want to format. The following instructions are
displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ FORMAT DISK 8ð2395 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ FORMAT DISK 8ð2396 │
│ │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ Set or Reset Identify. │
│ Select this option to set or reset the Identify indicator │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ Format. │
│ Select this option only if you are sure that you have selected │
│ the correct disk drive. │
│ FORMATTING DESTROYS ALL DATA ON THE DISK DRIVE. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

3. If you are not sure of the identification (pdisk number) of the disk drive module
that you want to format, use the identify function to get a positive physical
identification of the module (see “The Identify Function” on page 3-65). You can
further ensure that you have selected the correct disk drive module by verifying
that the serial number on the front of the disk drive module is the same as the
serial number that is displayed on the screen.
4. When you are sure that you have selected the correct disk drive module, select
Format.

3-80 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Certify Disk Service Aid

The Certify Disk service aid verifies that all the data on a disk drive module can be
read correctly. Instruction given elsewhere in this book tell you when you need to
run this service aid.

To use the Certify Disk service aid:


1. Select Certify Disk from the SSA Service Aids menu (see “Starting the SSA
Service Aids” on page 3-65). A list of pdisks is displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CERTIFY DISK 8ð24ð4 │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð 11111111 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk2 33333333 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk3 44444444 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk4 55555555 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk5 66666666 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk6 77777777 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk7 88888888 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ pdisk8 99999999 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ {BOTTOM} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-81


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. Select the pdisk that you want to certify. The following instructions are
displayed:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ SSA SERVICE AIDS 8ð238ð │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CERTIFY DISK 8ð24ð4 │

┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ CERTIFY DISK 8ð24ð5 │
│ │
│ pdisk1 22222222 ðð-ð4-P 2 GB SSA F Physical Disk Drive │
│ │
│ Move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Set or Reset Identify. │
│ Select this option to set or reset the Identify indicator │
│ on the disk drive. │
│ Certify. │
│ Select this option to start the Certify operation. │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

3. If you are not sure of the identification (pdisk number) of the disk drive module
that you want to format, use the identify function to get a positive physical
identification of the module (see “The Identify Function” on page 3-65). You can
further ensure that you have selected the correct disk drive module by verifying
that the serial number on the front of the disk drive module is the same as the
serial number that is displayed on the screen.
4. When you are sure that you have selected the correct disk drive module, select
Certify

3-82 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Aid Error Codes

If the SSA service aids detect an unrecoverable error and are unable to continue,
one of the following error codes might occur.
SSA01 Not enough using-system memory is available for this service aid to
continue. Take one of the actions described here:
Ÿ This problem might be caused by a failed application program. Ask
the user to end any failed application program, then try to run the
service aid again.
Ÿ Run diagnostics in the problem determination mode on the system
unit. If you find any problems, solve them; then try to run the service
aid again.
Ÿ Close down and reboot the using system; then try to run the service
aid again.
Ÿ Run diagnostics from diskette or CD-ROM to isolate the problem. If
you do not find a problem, the operating system might have failed.
SSA02 An unknown error has occurred. Take one of the actions described here:
Ÿ Run diagnostics in the problem determination mode to the system
unit. If you find any problems, solve them; then try to run the service
aid again.
Ÿ If diagnostics fail or if the same problem occurs when you try the
service aid again, run the diagnostics from diskette or CD-ROM to
isolate the problem. If you do not find a problem, the operating
system might have failed.
SSA03 The service aid was unable to open an hdisk. This problem might have
occurred because a disk drive module has failed or has been removed
from the system. Take the actions described here:
1. Use the Configuration Verification service aid (see “Configuration
Verification Service Aid” on page 3-77) to determine the location code
of the SSA adapter to which the hdisk is attached. (For example, if
the location code of the hdisk is 00-03-L, the location code of the SSA
adapter is 00-03.)
2. Run the Link Verification service aid (see “Link Verification Service
Aid” on page 3-73) to the SSA adapter.
3. If a link failure is indicated by the service aid, go to “SSA
Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs)” on page 2-35.
4. If no link failures are indicated, run the diagnostics in the system
verification mode to each pdisk that is attached to the SSA adapter.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-83


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the Service Aids for SSA-Link Problem Determination

If you have a problem with an SSA link, use the Link Verification service aid (see
“Link Verification Service Aid” on page 3-73). The following examples show various
loops and the associated information that is displayed by the Link Verification service
aid.

Example 1. Normal Loops In Figure 3-5, eight disk drive modules are connected
to connectors A1 and A2 of the SSA adapter. Five disk drive modules are
connected to connectors B1 and B2 of the same SSA adapter.

Figure 3-5. Normal Loops

3-84 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For this example, the Link Verification service aid displays the following information:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2386 │
│ │
│ SSA Link Verification for: │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA ADAPTER │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port │
│ │
│ A1 A2 B1 B2 Status │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð nnnnnnnn ð 7 Good │
│ pdisk1 nnnnnnnn 1 6 Good │
│ pdisk2 nnnnnnnn 2 5 Good │
│ pdisk3 nnnnnnnn 3 4 Good │
│ pdisk4 nnnnnnnn 4 3 Good │
│ pdisk5 nnnnnnnn 5 2 Good │
│ pdisk6 nnnnnnnn 6 1 Good │
│ pdisk7 nnnnnnnn 7 ð Good │
│ pdisk8 nnnnnnnn ð 3 Good │
│ pdisk9 nnnnnnnn 1 2 Good │
│ {MORE} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Note: Scroll the display to see all the connected disk drive modules.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-85


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Example 2. Broken Loop (Cable Removed): Each disk drive module normally
communicates with the adapter through one data path. Because data can pass
around the loop in either direction, however, the adapter automatically reconfigures
the loop to enable communication to continue to each disk drive if the loop becomes
broken.

In Figure 3-6, eight disk drive modules should be connected to connectors A1 and
A2 of the SSA adapter. However, the loop is broken because the SSA cable has
been disconnected from connector A2. Four disk drive modules are connected to
connectors B1 and B2 of the same SSA adapter.

Although the broken loop is reported as an error, all the disk drive modules can still
communicate with the using system. The eight disk drive modules can communicate
through connector A1 of the SSA adapter . The five disk drive modules can
communicate through connectors B1 and B2 of the same SSA adapter (normal loop).

Figure 3-6. Broken Loop

3-86 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For this example, the Link Verification service aid displays the following information:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2386 │
│ │
│ SSA Link Verification for: │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA ADAPTER │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port │
│ │
│ A1 A2 B1 B2 Status │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð nnnnnnnn ð Good │
│ pdisk1 nnnnnnnn 1 Good │
│ pdisk2 nnnnnnnn 2 Good │
│ pdisk3 nnnnnnnn 3 Good │
│ pdisk4 nnnnnnnn 4 Good │
│ pdisk5 nnnnnnnn 5 Good │
│ pdisk6 nnnnnnnn 6 Good │
│ pdisk7 nnnnnnnn 7 Good │
│ pdisk8 nnnnnnnn ð 3 Good │
│ pdisk9 nnnnnnnn 1 2 Good │
│ {MORE} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Note that the column for adapter connector A2 shows no connections.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-87


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Example 3. Broken Loop (Disk Drive Module Removed): Figure 3-7 shows
eight disk drive modules connected to connectors A1 and A2 of the SSA adapter, but
the loop is broken because disk drive module in slot 3 has been removed. Four disk
drive modules are connected to connectors B1 and B2 of the same SSA adapter.

Although the missing disk drive module is reported as an error, all the remaining disk
drive modules can still communicate with the using system. Two disk drive modules
can communicate through connector A1 of the SSA adapter. Five disk drive
modules can communicate through connector A2 of the SSA adapter. Five disk
drive modules can communicate through connectors B1 and B2 of the same SSA
adapter (normal loop).

Figure 3-7. Broken Loop (Disk Drive Module Removed)

3-88 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For this example, the Link Verification service aid displays the following information:
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ LINK VERIFICATION 8ð2386 │
│ │
│ SSA Link Verification for: │
│ ssa1 ðð-ð5 SSA ADAPTER │
│ │
│ To set or reset Identify, move cursor onto selection, then press Enter. │
│ │
│ Physical Serial# Adapter Port │
│ │
│ A1 A2 B1 B2 Status │
│ {TOP} │
│ pdiskð nnnnnnnn ð Good │
│ pdisk1 nnnnnnnn 1 Good │
│ ????? │
│ pdisk3 nnnnnnnn 4 Good │
│ pdisk4 nnnnnnnn 3 Good │
│ pdisk5 nnnnnnnn 2 Good │
│ pdisk6 nnnnnnnn 1 Good │
│ pdisk7 nnnnnnnn ð Good │
│ pdisk8 nnnnnnnn ð 3 Good │
│ pdisk9 nnnnnnnn 1 2 Good │
│ {MORE} │
│ │
│ F3=Cancel F1ð=Exit │
│ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Note that the missing disk drive module (pdisk2) is represented by a line of question
marks.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-89


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Finding the Physical Location of a Device

The physical location of a device (for example, a disk drive module or an SSA
adapter) cannot be reported directly by the using system because of the way in
which the SSA interface works. The address of an SSA device is related to the
position of that device on the SSA loop. The address can, therefore, change if the
configuration is changed.

Finding the Device When Service Aids Are Available

To help you to find the correct physical disk drive, the SSA service aids include an
identify function. This function, when selected, causes the check light of the selected
disk drive module to flash. For more details, see “SSA Service Aids” on page 3-64.

Some devices (for example, adapters) do not have check lights. To find such a
device, you can either use the identify function to identify devices that are next to the
SSA adapter on the SSA link, or use the procedure described in “Finding the Device
When No Service Aids Are Available.”

Finding the Device When No Service Aids Are Available

When no service aids are available, you must find the device by using the port (P)
and SSA-address (AA) values that are provided by some service request numbers
(SRNs). Examples of these SRNs are 43nnn, 44nnn, and 45nnn, where nnn
represents the PAA values.

The port (P) value can be a number from 0 to 3, which indicates the port connector
on the SSA adapter:
0 = Connector A1
1 = Connector A2
2 = Connector B1
3 = Connector B2

The AA value is the decimal SSA-address value. It indicates the position of the
device that you are trying to find (counted along the SSA link).

Use the port value to locate the relevant connector on the SSA adapter, then follow
the SSA cable to the first disk drive module or adapter in the same SSA loop. Do
not include dummy disk drive modules.

3-90 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The first disk drive module or adapter that you reach represents SSA-address count
0. Continue to follow the SSA link from disk drive module or adapter, increasing the
SSA-address count by 1 for each device, until you reach the disk drive module or
adapter that is indicated in the SRN.

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-91


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Microcode Maintenance

Updates to the microcode are loaded into the using system from diskettes. If the
level of the microcode that is stored in the using system is higher than the level of
the microcode that is installed on the SSA adapter or the disk drive modules, the
higher-level microcode is automatically downloaded to the adapter and disk drive
modules when the using system runs the device configuration method.

For some problems, the service request number (SRN) might ask you to check the
microcode package ID before you exchange any field-replaceable units (FRUs). You
can determine the package ID for the adapter in either of the following two ways:
Ÿ On the command line, type the following command and press Enter:
lsattr -E -l <adapter> -a ucode
where adapter is the ID of the adapter that you want to check; for example, ssa0.
The response to this command is:
ucode 8F97.ðð.nn Name of adapter download False
where nn is the adapter code package ID.
Ÿ Use the Display or Change Configuration or Vital Product Data (VPD) service aid
to display the VPD for the adapter. The first two characters of the ROS Level
field contain the adapter code package ID.

To determine the ID of the microcode package that is being used on a disk drive
module, use the Display or Change Configuration or Vital Product Data (VPD)
service aid to display the VPD for the disk drive module. The first two characters of
the ROS Level field contain the ID of the microcode package for the disk drive
module.
Note: During the configuration of the complete system, all the VPD files in the
system are updated before any microcode is downloaded from the using system to
the 6-pack. If the using system later downloads a new level of microcode to the
subsystem, the VPD for the adapter or disk drive module do not show the ID of the
new microcode package until the next time the configuration manager command
(cfgmgr) is run.

3-92 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Vital Product Data (VPD)

The vital product data (VPD) for the system unit and for the SSA adapter can be
displayed by using the using-system service aids. This section shows the types of
information that are contained in the VPD.

Abbreviations used in this section are:


DRAM Dynamic random-access memory
FRU Field-replaceable unit
RAM Random-access memory
ROM Read-only memory
ROS Read-only storage
SSA Serial storage architecture

4.5 GB, and 9.1 GB SSA Disk Drives


Part number Disk drive module part number
EC level Disk enclosure engineering change level
Serial number Disk enclosure serial number
Machine type and model Type and model
Manufacturer Manufacturer and plant code
ROS level and ID ROM and RAM code revision levels
Device specific Z2 RAM code load part number
Device specific Z3 Electronics card assembly part number
Device specific Z4 Disk enclosure date of manufacture

SSA Adapter
Part number Adapter card FRU part number
Serial number Adapter card serial number
Engineering change level Adapter card engineering change level
Manufacturing location Manufacturer and plant code
ROS level and ID Version of ROS code loaded on the adapter
Loadable microcode level Version of loadable code needed for the satisfactory
operation of this card

Chapter 3. Error Code to FRU Index 3-93


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Device driver level Minimum level of device driver needed for this level of
card
Description of function SSA adapter
Device specific (Z0) If the adapter contains additional DRAM modules, Z0
indicates the total DRAM size in megabytes
Device specific (Z1) If the adapter contains a pluggable fast-write cache
module, Z1 indicates the cache size in megabytes

3-94 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 4. Loading the System Diagnostics

The system diagnostics can be booted either from the default boot list or from the
service mode boot list. (The service mode boot list can be modified using the
system diagnostics "Display or Change Bootlist" service aid. The service mode boot
list cannot be modified under the System Management Services.)

To load Standalone Diagnostics from the default boot list, perform the following
procedure:
1. Verify with the system administrator and users that all programs may be stopped,
then do so.
2. Turn off the system.
3. Wait 30 seconds, and turn on the system.
4. Immediately insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
5. When or after the keyboard indicator appears during startup, press the F5 key on
a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 5 key on an ASCII terminal).
6. Enter any requested passwords.

Online Diagnostics can be loaded by booting from the service mode boot list by
pressing the F6 key (on a directly-attached keyboard) or the number 6 key on an
ASCII terminal.

The procedure for booting from the devices listed in the service mode boot list
(Online Diagnostics) is the following:
1. Verify with the system administrator and users that all programs may be stopped,
then do so.
2. Turn off the system.
3. Wait 30 seconds, and turn on the system.
4. When or after the keyboard indicator appears during startup, press the F6 key on
a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 6 key on an ASCII terminal).
5. Enter any requested passwords.

After any requested passwords have been entered, the system attempts to boot from
the first device of each type found on the list. If no bootable image is found on the
first device of each type on the list, the system does not search through the other
devices of that type for a bootable image; instead, it polls the first device of the next
type.

Chapter 4. Loading the System Diagnostics 4-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If all types of devices in the boot list have been polled without finding a bootable
image, the system restarts, this gives the user the opportunity to start the System
Management Services ( by pressing the F1 key on a directly attached keyboard or
the number 1 on an ASCII terminal) before the system attempts to boot again.

Default Boot List and Service Mode Boot List

The default boot list is:


1. Diskette
2. CD-ROM
3. Tape
4. Hard File
5. Network
Ÿ Token-Ring
Ÿ Ethernet

Pressing the F5 key on a directly-attached keyboard (or the number 5 key on an


ASCII terminal) causes the system to load Standalone Diagnostics given that a
Diagnostic CD is present in the CD-ROM drive.

Pressing the F6 key on a directly-attached keyboard (or number 6 key on an ASCII


terminal) loads Online Diagnostics from the service mode boot list, no Diagnostic
CD should be in the CD-ROM drive since Online Diagnostics is typically run from a
hard disk, which is in the service mode boot list defined using the system diagnostics
"Display or Change Bootlist" service aid. Like the default boot list, the service mode
boot list can contain five entries. The F6 or 6 keys work like the F5 or 5 keys, with
the following exceptions:
Ÿ The system searchs for a boot record according to the service mode boot list.
Ÿ If the service mode boot list is discovered by a cyclical redundancy check to be
corrupted, the system rebuilds the service mode boot list according to the default
boot list. (The default boot list contains five entries, and for each matching
device type found in the system unit, the system makes an entry in the service
mode boot list.)
Ÿ If no service mode boot list is present, the system uses the default boot list.

4-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 5. System Management Services

The System Management Services make it possible for you to view information
about your computer and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing
device configurations.

If you have chosen a graphical display as your system console, you can use the
graphical System Management Services described below. If you are using an ASCII
display as your system console, see “Text-Based System Management Services” on
page 5-24.

Graphical System Management Services

To start the Open Firmware command line or graphical System Management


Services, turn on or restart the computer.

After the logo is displayed, initialization icons appear across the bottom of the
screen.

To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the F8 key after the
keyboard icon appears during startup.

If you have pressed the F8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK" prompt)
appears after the initialization and power-on self test (POST) are complete.

The Open Firmware command line is used to set up adapters that are not
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation
directs you to use this option if it is needed.

To exit from the Open Firmware command enter reset-all or power the system
down and reboot.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To enter the graphical System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware
command line, you must press the F1 key after the keyboard icon appears during
startup.

After the System Management Services starts, the following screen appears.

You may also press F8 here to enter the OK> prompt.

5-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The System Management Services screen contains the following choices.

Config: Enables you to view your system configuration.

MultiBoot: Invokes the Mulitboot menu which provides several


functions:
Ÿ To Select a particular operating system to boot.
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive
a an informational icon after making this selection this
would mean that information in non-volatile storage could
have been lost, as would happen if the battery had been
removed. In order to recreate this value, issue the bootlist
command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to
the location of the operating system in a particular hard
disk. Please see the explanation of the bootlist command
in your AIX documentation.
Ÿ To select a particular operating system as the default
operating system
Ÿ To install from the list of possible devices
Ÿ To set the sequence in which devices are searched for
operating system startup code
Ÿ To go to the Open Firmware command prompt
Ÿ To set the Multiboot menu so that it comes up immediately
as the system powers up

Utilities: Enables you to set and remove passwords, enable


the unattended start mode, set and view the addresses of your
system's SCSI controllers, select the active console, view or
clear the error log, and update your system firmware.

Exit: Returns you to the previous screen.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To select an icon, move the cursor with the arrow keys to choose which icon is
highlighted, then press the Enter key. You can also select an icon by clicking on it
with your left mouse button. To leave the current screen, either press the Esc key or
select the Exit icon.

5-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Config

Selecting this icon makes it possible for you to view information about the setup of
your system unit. A list similar to the following appears when you select the Config
icon.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Selecting the down arrow key or Page Down key displays the next configuration
screen, which lists your computer's firmware version, the date of its development,
and the firmware part number.

The following screen is provided by the service processor.

5-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MultiBoot:

This selection invokes the Mulitboot menu which provides several functions:
Ÿ To Select a particular operating system to boot.
In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a an informational
icon after making this selection this would mean that information in non-volatile
storage could have been lost, as would happen if the battery had been removed.
In order to recreate this value, issue the bootlist command under AIX with the
appropriate parameters as to the location of the operating system in a particular
hard disk. Please see the explanation of the bootlist command in your AIX
documentation.
Ÿ To select a particular operating system as the default operating system
Ÿ To install from the list of possible devices
Ÿ To set the sequence in which devices are searched for operating system startup
code
Ÿ To go to the Open Firmware command prompt
Ÿ To set the Multiboot menu so that it comes up immediately as the system powers
up

The Select Software option, if supported by the operating system, shows the names
of the operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating
systems.

In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a message saying that:
No Operating System Installed

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
this would mean that information in non-volatile storage could have been lost, as
would happen if the battery had been removed. In order to recreate this value issue
the bootlist command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location of
the operating system in a particular Hard disk. Please see the explanation of the
bootlist command in your AIX documentation.

The Software Default option, if supported by the operating system, lets you select the
default operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by
all operating systems.

The Install From option produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, where
the operating system is installed from. You select one of the devices and the system
searches the device for an operating system to install and if supported by the
operating system in that device, the name of the operating system displays.

The Select Boot Device option provides a list of devices that can be selected to be
stored on the boot list. Up to 5 devices are supported.

The OK Prompt procvides access to the Open Firmware command prompt. The
Open Firmware command prompt is used for debug purposes, and device driver
development. Information about the commands that are available in the IEEE
Standard 1275.

The Multiboot Start option toggles between OFF and ON and selects if the Multiboot
menu invokes automatically on startup or not.

Boot

This selection enables you to view and change the custom boot list (the sequence in
which devices are searched for operating system startup code).

5-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Attention: If you change your startup sequence, you must be extremely careful
when performing write operations (for example, copying, saving, or formatting). You
can accidentally overwrite data or programs if you select the wrong drive.

The default boot sequence is:


Ÿ The primary diskette drive
Ÿ CD-ROM drive
Ÿ Tape id=5 (slot=1)
Ÿ Hard disk drive id=6 (Slot=1)
Ÿ Network device.
To change the custom boot list, enter a new order in the New column, then select
Save. The List of Boot Devices is updated to reflect the order you have chosen.

You can choose 1 to 5 devices for the custom boot list. To change the boot
sequence back to the default values, select Default. (The default sequence is
automatically saved.)

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Utilities

Selecting this icon enables you to perform various tasks and view additional
information about your computer.

The following describes the choices available on this screen.

Password: Enables you to set password protection for turning


on the computer and for using system administration tools.

Error Log: Enables you to view and clear error log information
for your computer.

RIPL (Remote Initial Program Load): Allows you to select a


remote system from which to load programs via a network
adapter when your system unit is first turned on. This option
also allows you to configure network adapters which require
setup.

5-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Update: Allows you to update the firmware programs on your
computer.

Console: If you have more than one display attached to your


system unit, or if you have an ASCII terminal attached to your
system unit in addition to a keyboard and display, this tool
allows you to define which one is active.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Password

When you select this icon, the following screen is displayed.

Power-On Password: Setting a power-on password helps protect information stored


in your computer. If a power-on password is set for your computer, the Power On
icon is shown in the locked position; if a power-on password is not set, then the
Power On icon is shown in the unlocked position (as in the screen above).

When you select the Entry icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in
the box.

5-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the password again for
verification.

If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.

After you have entered and verified the password, the power-on password icon
flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that the power-on password is
set.

If you previously had set a power-on password and want to remove it, select the
Remove icon.

Note: If you forget the power-on password, you have to remove the battery for at
least 30 seconds to disable this password. See “Battery” on page 6-38 for
details.

Attention: After you remove the battery, you must reconfigure your system (bootlist,
IP parameters, console information, support processor, etc).

A password can be set only after the system is turned off and on again.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Remote Mode: The remote mode, when enabled, allows the system to start from
the defined boot device. This mode is ideal for network servers and other computers
that operate unattended. You must set a power-on password before you can enable
the remote mode. When the remote mode is set, the icon changes to Remote
<On>.

If you remove the power-on password, the remote mode is automatically reset, and
the icon returns to Remote <Off>.

Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects against the


unauthorized starting of the system programs.

When you select the Entry icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes appears. Type your
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key appears in
the box.

Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the password again for
verification.

If you make a mistake, press the Esc key and start again.

5-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


After you have entered and verified the password, the privileged-access password
icon flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that your computer now
requires the password you just entered before running system programs.
Note: If you forget the power-on password, you have to remove the battery for at
least 30 seconds to disable this password. See “Battery” on page 6-38 for
details.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Error Log

Selecting this icon displays the log of errors your computer has encountered during
operations.

Selecting the Clear icon erases the entries in this log.

5-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


RIPL

Selecting the Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL) icon above gives you access to
the following selections.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-17


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Set Address icon allows you to define addresses from which your computer can
receive RIPL code.

Notes:
1. Some applications may require that IP addresses contain leading zeroes for
numbers less than 100. For example, 129.132.4.20 may need to be entered as
123.132.004.020.
If any of the addresses is incomplete or contains a number other than 0 to 255, an
error message is displayed when you select the Save icon. To clear this error,
change the improper address and select Save again.
Note: You should save a copy of your changes in case you need to replace your
battery.

5-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The Ping icon allows you to confirm that a specified address is valid by sending a
test transmission to that address.

After choosing the Ping option, you may be asked to indicate which communications
adapter (Token Ring or Ethernet) should be used to send the test transmission.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-19


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Config icon allows you to configure network adapters which require setup.
Selecting the Config icon presents a list of the adapters requiring configuration. Use
the arrow keys to highlight an adapter, press the spacebar to select the adapter, then
highlight the OK icon and press the Enter key.

The next screen allows you to select the configuration of the adapter you have just
chosen (or allow the system to select the configuration automatically). As on the
previous screen, use the arrow keys to highlight, press the space bar to select, then
highlight the OK icon and press enter.

5-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SCSI ID

This selection allows you to view and change the addresses (IDs) of the SCSI
controllers attached to your system unit. To change an ID, highlight the entry by
moving the arrow keys, then use the space bar to scroll through the available ID's.
After you have entered the new address, use the arrow keys to highlight the Save
icon and press the Enter key.

At any time in this process, you can select the Default icon to change the SCSI IDs
to the default values.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Update

This selection allows you to update the service processor and system firmware in
your system unit from an image on a 3.5 inch diskette. After choosing to update the
firmware and confirming this choice, you must insert the diskette containing the
firmware image.

ATTENTION: While the new firmware image is being copied into your system unit,
you must not turn off the system unit. Turning off the system unit during the
update process may render your system unit inoperable.

After the flash update is complete, the system unit restarts.

If the flash update does not complete successfully or the system unit does not restart
after the flash update, contact your authorized reseller or marketing representative.

5-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Firmware Recovery

If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the firmware information in your


system unit has been corrupted, then you must perform a firmware recovery.

To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:


1. Locate your firmware update diskette.
2. Using another system unit, rename the
*.img ,br file on the firmware update diskette to
precover.img
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.
5. Turn on your system unit.
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the 1 key if the system console is
an ASCII terminal, or the F1 key if the system console is a directly-attached
keyboard.
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a
Firmware Update as described above.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-23


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Text-Based System Management Services

The text-based Open Firmware command line and System Management Services are
available if an ASCII terminal is attached to your system unit. The text-based Open
Firmware command line allows you to configure some adapters, and the System
Management Services makes it possible for you to view information about your
system unit and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing device
configurations.

To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the 8 key after the
keyboard text symbol appears during startup.

If you have pressed the 8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an "OK" prompt)
appears after the initialization and power-on self tests (POST) are complete.

The Open Firmware command line can be used to set up adapters that are not
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation
directs you to use this option if it is needed.

To exit from the Open Firmware command enter reset-all or power the system
down and reboot.

To start the text-based System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware
command line, press 1 on the ASCII terminal keyboard when the keyboard text
symbol appears during startup.

5-24 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


After the text-based System Management Services starts, the following screen
appears.

à ð
System Management Services

1. Display Configuration
2. Multiboot
3. Utilities
4. Select Language

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

====>

á ñ

Selecting the numbered options provide capabilities described on the following


pages.

After you have finished using the text-based System Management Services, entering
x (for exit) boots your computer.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-25


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Display Configuration

This option provides information about the setup of your computer. A screen similar
to the following is displayed.

à ð
Device

PowerPC 6ð4
L2-Cache, ð512K
Memory
slotA=8MB
slotB=8MB
LPT
addr=3BC
COM
addr=3F8
COM
addr=2F8
Audio
Keyboard
Mouse
Diskette
addr=3Fð
Integrated Ethernet
addr=8ððð5AF67BD
SCSI cntlr id=7

PCI Adapters

.-----------. .-----------. .------.


|P=prev-page| |N=next-page| |x=Exit|
-----------' -----------' ------'

á ñ

Note that this configuration information does not include ISA adapters installed in the
system unit.

5-26 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


MultiBoot Menu

à Multiboot Menu ð
1. Select Software
2. Software Default
3. Install From
4. Select Boot Devices
5. OK Prompt
6. Mulitboot Startup <OFF> (or <ON>)

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

The Select Software option, if supported by the operating system, shows the names
of the operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating
systems.

In the case of AIX this is a supported option, if you receive a message saying that:
No Operating System Installed
this would mean that information in non-volatile storage could have been lost, as
would happen if the battery had been removed. In order to recreate this value issue
the bootlist command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location of
the operating system in a particular Hard disk. Please see the explanation of the
bootlist command in your AIX documentation.

The Software Default option, if supported by the operating system, lets you select the
default operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by
all operating systems.

The Install From option produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, where
the operating system is installed from. You select one of the devices and the system
searches the device for an operating system to install and if supported by the
operating system in that device, the name of the operating system displays.

The Select Boot Device option provides a list of devices that can be selected to be
stored on the boot list. Up to 5 devices are supported.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-27


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The OK Prompt procvides access to the Open Firmware command prompt. The
Open Firmware command prompt is used for debug purposes, and device driver
development. Information about the commands that are available in the IEEE
Standard 1275.

The Multiboot Start option toggles between OFF and ON and selects if the Multiboot
menu invokes automatically on startup or not.

Select Boot Devices

This selection enables you to view and change the custom boot list, which is the
sequence of devices read at startup time.

à Select Boot Devices ð


1. Display Current Settings
2. Restore Default Settings
3. Configure 1st Boot Device
4. Configure 2nd Boot Device
5. Configure 3rd Boot Device
6. Configure 4th Boot Device
7. Configure 5th Boot Device

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

====>

á ñ

Selecting the Display Current Settings option lists the current order of devices in the
boot list. The following screen shows an example of this display.

5-28 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


à Current Boot Sequence ð
1. Diskette
2. Ethernet (Integrated)
3. SCSI CD-ROM id=3 (slot=1)
4. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk id=6 (slot=1)
5. SCSI 5ððMB Hard Disk id=5 (slot=5)

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-29


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Selecting any of the Configure Boot Device options displays the following screen.

à ð
Configure Nth Boot Device

Device Number Current Position Device Name

1 1 Diskette
2 2 Ethernet
3 3 SCSI CD-ROM
4 4 SCSI 4.5GB Hard Disk
5 -

.-----------. .-----------. .------.


|P=prev-page| |N=next-page| |X=Exit|
-----------' -----------' ------'

===>

á ñ

5-30 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Utilities

The Utilities screen enables you to select from the following system management
tools.

à ð
Utilities

1. Set Password and Unattended Start Mode


2. Audio <ON>
3. Display Error Log
4. Remote Initial Program Load Setup
5. Change SCSI id
6. Update System Firmware
7. Update Service Processor
8. Select Console

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'
===>

á ñ

Set Password and Unattended Start Mode: Entering this selection permits
access to the following options.

à ð
Password Utilities

1. Set Power On Password


2. Remove Power On Password
3. Unattended Start Mode <OFF>
4. Set Privileged-Access Password
5. Remove Privileged-Access Password

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'
===>

á ñ

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-31


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Set Power On Password: Setting a power-on password helps protect information
stored in your computer. You can use any combination of up to eight characters
(A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your password. The password you type is not displayed on
the screen. Press Enter when you are finished; you are required to type the
password again for verification.

If you previously had set a power-on password and wanted to remove it, select
Remove Power-On Password.
Note: If you forget your password, you have to shut down the computer and
remove the battery for at least 30 seconds to disable the password. See
“Battery” on page 6-38 for details.

A password can be set only after the system is turned off and on again.

5-32 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Set Privileged-Access Password: The privileged-access password protects against
the unauthorized starting of the system programs.

If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select
Remove Privileged-Access Password.
Note: If you forget your password, you have to shut down the computer and
remove the battery for at least 30 seconds to disable the password. See
“Battery” on page 6-38 for details.

Audio: Selecting this utility turns on or off the system tones heard at power-on
time.

Remote Initial Program Load Setup: This option allows you to enable and set
up the remote startup capability of your computer. First, you are asked to specify the
network parameters.

à ð
Network Parameters

1. IP Parameters
2. Adapter Parameters
3. Ping

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Note: Some applications may require that IP addresses contain leading zeroes for
numbers less than 100. For example, 129.132.4.20 may need to be entered as
123.132.004.020.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-33


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Selecting the IP Parameters option displays the following screen.

à IP Parameters ð
1. Client IP Address ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð
2. Server IP Address ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð
3. Gateway IP Address ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð
4. Subnet Mask ððð.ððð.ððð.ððð

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

===>

á ñ

Selecting the Adapter Parameters option allows you to view an adapter's hardware
address as well as configure network adapters that require setup.

à ð
Adapter Parameters

Device HW Address

1. 3Com,3C9ð5 8ððð5AFC67BD
2. Token-Ring 8ððð32E54A12

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

á ñ

5-34 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Selecting option 1 (3Com,3C905) displays the following 100Mb Ethernet
configuration menus:

à ð
3Com Etherlink Fast XL

1. Media Type [Auto]


2. Full Duplex [Auto]

.------.
|X=Exit|
------'

á ñ

Selecting the Media Type option allows you the change the media employed by the
Ethernet adapter:

à ð
.----------------.
| MEDIA TYPE |
| 1. 1ð BaseT |
| 2. 1ðð Base TX |
| 3. Auto |
----------------'

á ñ

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-35


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Selecting the Full Duplex option allows you to change how the Ethernet adapter
communicates with the network:

à ð
.----------------.
| Full Duplex |
| 1. Yes |
| 2. No |
| 3. Auto |
----------------'

á ñ

Ping, the last option available from the Network Parameters menu, allows you to test
a connection to a remote system unit. After selecting the Ping option, you must
choose which adapter communicates with the remote system.

à ð
Interface

1. Ethernet (Integrated)
2. Token Ring (Slot=3)

===>

á ñ

5-36 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


After choosing which adapter to use to ping the remote system, you must provide the
addresses needed to communicate with the remote system.

à Ping ð
1. Client IP Address 129.132.4.2ð
2. Server IP Address 129.132.4.1ð
3. Gateway IP Address 129.132.4.3ð
4. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.ð

.---------. .------.
|E=Execute| |X=Exit|
---------' ------'

===>

á ñ

Display Error Log: A screen similar to the following is displayed when you select
this option. Here, you can view or clear your computer's error log.

à ð
.----------------------------------------------------------.
| Error Log |
| |
| Date Time ErrorCode Location |
| Entry 1. 96/ð4/ð1 12:13:22 25A8ðð11 ðð-ðð |
| Entry 2. no error logged |
----------------------------------------------------------'

.-----------------. .------.
|C=Clear Error Log| |X=Exit|
-----------------' ------'

á ñ

Change SCSI ID: This option allows you to view and change the addresses of the
SCSI controllers attached to you computer.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-37


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Update System Firmware: This option allows you to update your system
firmware. Note that you must insert a diskette containing the firmware update image
after you see the following confirmation screen.

à ð
.--------------------------------------------------------------.
| This selection will update your System Firmware. Do you want |
| to continue? Press Y(Yes) N(No). |
--------------------------------------------------------------'

á ñ

Firmware Recovery: If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the firmware


information in your system unit has been corrupted, then you must perform a
firmware recovery.

To perform a firmware recovery, do the following:


1. Locate your firmware update diskette.
2. Using another system unit, rename the
*.img
file on the firmware update diskette to
precover.img
3. Make sure your system unit is turned off.
4. Insert the firmware recovery diskette into your system unit.
5. Turn on your system unit.
6. When the keyboard indicator appears, press the 1 key on the system console
ASCII terminal.
7. When the System Management Services appear, choose Utilities and perform a
System Firmware Update as described above.

Select Console: Selecting this option allows you to define which display is used
by the system for system management.

5-38 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Select Language

This option allows you to change the language used by the text-based System
Management Services screens.

à ð
SELECT LANGUAGE

1. English
2. Francais
3. Deutsch
4. Italiano
5. Espanol
6. Svenska

====> .------.
|x=Exit|
------'
á ñ

Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to
properly display languages other than English.

Chapter 5. System Management Services 5-39


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5-40 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures

Before performing any of the removal or replacement procedures in this chapter,


read the following notice.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous


voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet
is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power


cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.

When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,


ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before
the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power
cables from the existing system before you add a device.

Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables


to prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
electrical potentials.

During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations ,


printers, telephones, or station protectors for communications lines.

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cable and plug for the user's
safety. Use this power cable in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Handling Static–Sensitive Devices

Attention: Adapters, planars, diskette drives, and disk drives are sensitive to static
electricity discharge. These devices are wrapped in antistatic bags, as shown in this
illustration, to prevent this damage.

Take the following precautions:


Ÿ If you have an antistatic wrist strap available, use it while handling the device.
Ÿ Do not remove the device from the antistatic bag until you are ready to install the
device in the system unit.
Ÿ With the device still in its antistatic bag, touch it to a metal frame of the system.
Ÿ Grasp cards and boards by the edges. Hold drives by the frame. Avoid touching
the solder joints or pins.
Ÿ If you need to lay the device down while it is out of the antistatic bag, lay it on
the antistatic bag. Before picking it up again, touch the antistatic bag and the
metal frame of the system unit at the same time.
Ÿ Handle the devices carefully in order to prevent permanent damage.

6-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Covers

Removal
1. Open the door.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. Remove the door by carefully lifting it up and off the hinges. Store it in a safe
place.

3. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, optical discs, or tapes) from drives; then turn
the power off to the system and all attached devices.
4. Shutdown the operating system.
5. Turn off power to the system and all attached options.

6-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the system, disconnect the
telephone line.

7. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets.


Note the location of the following; then disconnect them from the back of the
system:
Ÿ Power cord
Ÿ Display cable
Ÿ Keyboard cable
Ÿ Any other cables and cords

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8. Remove the front cover:
a. Unlock the keylock on the front cover.
b. Lift up on the latch on the left side of the front cover.

6-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


c. Grasp the sides of the front cover near the top of the system and pull it
forward. (The front cover is held in place by two spring detented ball studs.)
d. Detach the front cover's bottom hooks from the grooves located on the
bottom of the system, and lift the front cover off the bottom of the system.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
9. Remove the side cover:
a. Open the side cover to a 90 degree angle.
b. Remove the cover by carefully lifting it up and off the hinges. Store it in a
safe place.

10. Remove the I/O Planar cover:


Attention If your system has the SSA bulkhead cable installed, make sure that
you do not damage the cable as you remove the I/O planar cover.
a. Loosen the three screws (2 turns) on the I/O planar cover and unlatch the
cover.

6-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


b. Remove the I/O planar cover.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Replacement
1. I/O Planar Cover
a. Place the lip at the top of the I/O planar cover over the top of the system
adapter housing. Push the bottom of the I/P planar cover in, aligning the key
on the system with the key slot on the cover. Replace the I/O planar cover.
b. Latch the cover and tighten the three screws.

6-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Reinstall the side cover:
a. Place the side cover at a 90 degree angle. Align the pins on the rear of the
side cover with the two hinges on the rear of the system.
b. Slide the side cover down.
c. Push the side cover to close it.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Reinstall the front cover:
Note: Before installing the front cover, verify that the side cover is installed
correctly. If the side cover is not properly installed, the front cover will
not align correctly when you attempt to install it.
a. Align the bottom of the front cover with the bottom of the system.
b. Fit the front cover's bottom hooks into the grooves located on the bottom of
the system.
c. Pivot the front cover upward and press the top of the cover into the top of
the system until they snap together.
d. Lock the front cover.

6-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


e. Latch the cover latch located on the left side of the front cover.

4. Reinstall the door at the front of the system by aligning the pins with the hinges,
and sliding the door down.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Close the door.

6-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Power Supply
DANGER

Do not attempt to open the covers of the power supply. Power supplies
are not serviceable and are to be replaced as a unit.

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Disconnect the two cables from I/O Planar connectors P1, and P2.
3. Disconnect the four cables from the System Card connectors J1, J2 J3, and J4.
4. Disconnect the cables from the Processor Cards.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Disconnect the power cables at the power supply that connect to the backplanes.
.

6. Disconnect the power cord from rear of the power supply.


7. Remove the three screws from the power supply.

8. Remove the power supply from the system. Slide the power supply forward,
toward the front. Lift it up and out of the system.

6-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Replacement
1. Place the power supply in the bottom of the system. Slide the power supply
backward, toward the rear of the system.
2. Secure the power-supply assembly by installing the three screws that you
removed in step 7 on page 6-16.

3. Reconnect the cables.


a. Reconnect the power supply cables between the power supplies and
backplanes that were removed in step 5 on page 6-16.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-17


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
b. Reconnect the cable labeled P1 to I/O Planar connector P1.
c. Reconnect the cable labeled P2 to I/O Planar connector P2.
d. Reconnect the cable labeled P17 to system card connector J1.
e. Reconnect the cable labeled P16 to system card connector J2.
f. Reconnect the cable labeled P15 to system card connector J3.
g. Reconnect the cable labeled P7 to system card connector J4.
h. Reconnect the cable labeled P4 to top processor card.
i. Reconnect the cable labeled P3 to bottom processor card.

6-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


CD-ROM Drive, Tape Drive, Diskette Drive

CAUTION:
Do not open the drive; no user adjustments or serviceable parts are inside.

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Disconnect the power and signal cables to the drive you are removing.
3. Slide the drive forward to remove.

Replacement

Replace in reverse order.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-19


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Backplane

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the screw from the backplane.

3. Slide the backplane out to gain cable access.


4. Disconnect the SCSI cable, EPOW cable, and power supply cable from the
backplane.
5. Remove the backplane.

6-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Replacement

If you installed a SCSI backplane, check the jumpers on the new backplane for
proper setting. The jumpers should be set as shown.

Replace in reverse order.

If you installed an SSA backplane, be sure to connect the internal SSA cable
between the backplane and the internal connectors on the external SSA connector.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Adapters

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described in on page 6-8.
3. Locate the adapter connectors and determine which adapter you want to remove.

6-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Remove the screw holding the adapter.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-23


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Remove the adapter.

Replacement
1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and then pick up the adapter.
2. Locate the adapter connector location on the I/O planar.

6-24 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3. Install the new adapter.

4. Replace any parts previously removed in reverse order.


5. Replace the covers as described in “Covers” on page 6-3.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-25


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Memory Cards

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8; then return here to
determine your next step.
3. Remove the memory adapter card shield.

4. The card is secured in place with card retainer hooks, one on each end of the
card. Open the card retainer hooks and remove the card.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and
close the retainer hooks at the same time.

6-26 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Replacement
1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and then pick up the memory card.
2. Open the retainer hooks.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and
close the retainer hooks at the same time.
3. Remove the connector cover if you are installing the card in an unused memory
card slot.
4. Place the memory card in the card guide rails.
5. Make sure that the black tabs on the new card are captured by the retainer
hooks.
6. Align the card with the connector.
7. Close the retainer hooks to set the card.
Attention: To prevent damage to the card and the card connectors, open and
close the retainer hooks at the same time.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-27


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8. Install the memory shield on the bottom memory card.

.
9. Replace any parts previously removed in reverse order.
10. Replace the covers as described in “Covers” on page 6-3.

6-28 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Memory Module

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
3. Remove the memory card as described in “Memory Cards” on page 6-26.
4. Locate the memory module connectors and determine which module you want to
remove.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-29


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Remove the memory module by pushing the tabs out on the memory connectors.

Replacement
1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and then pick up a memory module.
2. Locate the memory module connector location on the memory card.
3. Install the new memory module.

4. Replace the memory card.


5. Replace the covers as described in “Covers” on page 6-3.

6-30 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


I/O Planar
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
Note: Adapter cables (SCSI) should be labeled to insure correct installation of
cables to adapters slots. Rearranging the order of the SCSI slots to the disk
drive banks causes errors.
3. Remove all adapter cards.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-31


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4. Remove the Processor card(s), as described in “Processor Card” on page 6-35.

6-32 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5. Remove the memory card(s), as described in “Memory Cards” on page 6-26.

6. Remove the service processor.

7. Remove the system card.


8. Disconnect all cables from the connectors on the I/O planar.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-33


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
9. Remove eight screws connecting the I/O planar to the rear of the system. Note
that the screws in the SCSI connector are black.
10. Remove 12 screws from the I/O planar.
11. Remove I/O planar.
Note: The system card can be removed without removing the I/O planar.
However, you must remove the system card before removing the I/O planar.

Replacement

Replace in reverse order.


Note: Be sure to install the two black screws in the SCSI connector.

Verify that the security jumpers (J16) are in the correct position (same as the
replaced I/O planar).

6-34 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Processor Card

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
Attention: Make sure the power cord is unplugged and the power (Power LED)
is OFF before removing the CPU card.
3. Remove the power cable from the CPU card by squeezing the tabs.
4. The card is secured in place with card retainer hooks, one on each end of the
card. Open the card retainer hooks and remove the card.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-35


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Replacement
1. With one hand, touch any metal surface of the chassis to minimize static
electrical charges, and then pick up the CPU card.
2. Install the new CPU card.
3. Replace any parts previously removed in reverse order.
4. Replace the covers as described in “Covers” on page 6-3.
Note: If the system has only one CPU card, it must be installed in the primary CPU
slot. See “AIX and Physical Location Code Reference Table” on page 3-48
for the location.

6-36 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Processor

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
Attention: Make sure the power cord is unplugged and the power LED is OFF
before removing the service processor.
3. Remove the service processor.

Replacement

To replace the service processor, perform the removal steps in the reverse order.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-37


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Battery
CAUTION:
A lithium battery can cause fire, explosion, or a severe burn. Do not recharge,
disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F), solder directly to the cell, incinerate, or
expose cell contents to water. Keep away from children. Replace only with the
part number specified for your system. Use of another battery may present a
risk of fire or explosion.

The battery connector is polarized; do not attempt to reverse polarity.

Dispose of the battery according to local regulations.

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
3. Locate the battery on the I/O planar.

6-38 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the front of the server. (The
spring mechanism behind the battery pushes it out toward you as you slide it
forward.) Use your thumb and index finger to hold the battery as it pushes out of
the socket.

Replacement

Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket. As you slide the
battery toward the front of the server, push it down into the socket.

Notes:
1. Be sure to tell the customer that the time and date need to be reset.
If running AIX the bootlist command may have to be run from AIX while logged in
as root, this would restore the custom boot list and allow the option of Select
Software under multiboot to start the operating system. Other parameters that
may have to be rebuilt are the IP parameters.

6-40 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Ensure that the battery polarity is correct; place the battery in the holder with the
positive side facing up.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-41


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fans

Removal
1. Do the cover removal procedure in “Covers” on page 6-3.
2. If removing one of the two upper fans, remove the adapter cards, remove the
three screws from the adapter card bracket and remove the bracket.
Note: The fans are numbered from bottom to top as fan 1, fan 2, fan 3, and fan
4. So the two upper fans are fans 3 and 4.

3. Disconnect the fan cable from the I/O planar.


4. Pull the shock mounts out of their mounting holes.
5. Remove the fan.

6-42 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Replacement

Replace in reverse order.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-43


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Operator Panel Display

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the front covers as described in
“Covers” on page 6-3.
2. Press the snap in detent on the right side of the display card mounting bracket
and remove the display card.
3. Rotate the display forward and out of the mounting bracket.

4. Disconnect the display cable from the connector on the display assembly.

Replacement

Replace in reverse order. Ensure that the grounding clips located inside the
mounting bracket are not bent or damaged and that they are positioned correctly.

6-44 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Operator Panel Control Assembly

Removal
1. Do the cover removal procedure in “Covers” on page 6-3.
2. Remove the assembly by compressing the spring clip at the top and bottom of
the assembly and pulling out toward the rear of the system.
3. Unplug the LCD cable from the assembly.
4. Unplug the control card cable from the I/O planar.
5. Swap the VPD module (U2 on the Operator Panel Control Assembly) from the
old assembly to the new one. In the unlikely event that the old VPD module is
determined to be the problem, return the new one to the system and call
technical support for recovery instructions.

Replacement

Replace in reverse order.

Chapter 6. Removal and Replacement Procedures 6-45


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Serial/Parallel Card

Removal
1. If you have not already done so, remove the covers as described in “Covers” on
page 6-3.
2. Remove the I/O planar cover as described on page 6-8.
3. Remove the external serial and parallel connectors from the rear of the system.
4. Remove the cables from the I/O planar connectors J41, J47, and J50.
5. Remove the screws that attach the serial/parallel card to the system.

Replacement

Replace in reverse order.

Connect the cables as follows:

P1 J41 (I/O planar)


P2 J47 (I/O planar)
P3 J50 (I/O planar)

6-46 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Chapter 7. Parts Information

Chapter 7. Parts Information 7-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
7-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index Part Number Units Per Description
1 93H5758 1 Chassis assembly (includes covers and
side door)
2 73H0898 1 EMC clip
3 06H7082 1 Display panel
4 93H1816 1 Cable (Display)
5 93H2922 1 Operator panel control assembly
6 07L6594 1 I/O Board
7 06H7697 13 Standoff
8 33F8354 1 Battery
9 73H3520 1 CPU Lever
73H3525 1 Lever (front)
73H3529 1 Lever (rear)
10 93H3960 1 Brace
73H3531 1 Card Guide
11 93H6280 1 Cable (EPOW)
12 73H3577 1 Fan (#1)
40H1424 1 Fan (#3)
40H1433 2 Fan (#2 and #4)
13 93H4214 1 Service processor
14 93H2641 1 or 2 Memory Card
15 93H4700 Up to 8 pair 32MB memory module
93H4702 Up to 8 pair 128MB memory module
16 See note Up to 9 Adapter card
17 93H2679 1 or 2 166 MHz CPU card (1 way)
73H4768 1 or 2 166 MHz CPU card (2 way)
93H9018 1 or 2 332 MHz CPU card (1 way)
93H8945 1 or 2 332 MHz CPU card (2 way)
18 93H3144 1 EMC gasket (I/O connectors)
19 93H3145 1 EMC gasket (Ext. SCSI connector)
20 93H2166 1 SCSI Backplane (Hot swap)
93H6321 1 SSA Backplane (Hot swap)
21 93H8544 1 Door assembly, right side
22 93H9789 1 I/O Planar cover
23 93H9789 1 Power supply
24 93H4529 1 Adapter card bracket
25 CD ROM 1 See note
26 11H8156 1 Pedestal and wheel
27 73H1881 1 Front cover (IBM)
73H1897 1 Front cover (OEM)
28 93H4297 1 Logo
29 See Note 1 Diskette drive
30 06H2792 1 Plate assembly
31 73H0870 1 Bezel (Operator panel)
32 See note Up to 2 Media device
33 40H3142 1 Bracket (Display panel)
34 See note Up to 18 Disk drive
35 See note Up to 18 Disk drive carrier assembly
36 93H60109 1 Serial/Parallel Card and Cables
37 73H1925 1 System Board

Chapter 7. Parts Information 7-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Note: See IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems for part
numbers.

7-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index Part Number Units Per Description
1 06H6660 Up to 3 Cable (SCSI adapter to backplane)
73H1894 1 Cable (diskette)
39H9994 1 Cable (Power 2-drop)
92F1294 3 Cable clamp
93H9816 A/R Screw (3.5 x 6)
93H4339 Up to 3 Cable SSA ground strap (backplane to
93H4341 1 chassis)
93H9821 1-2 Cable SSA (backplane to bulkhead)
93H4340 Up to 3 Cable SSA (backplane to backplane)
1 Cable SSA (adapter to backplane)
Cable SSA 0.6m link (bulkhead to
adapter)

Chapter 7. Parts Information 7-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Index Part Number Units Per Description
1 82G3278 1 Keyboard, United States English
1391402 1 Keyboard, French
1393395 1 Keyboard, Italian
1391403 1 Keyboard, German/Austrian
1391406 1 Keyboard, United Kingdom English
1391405 1 Keyboard, Spanish
79F0167 1 Keyboard, Japanese
64F7707 1 Keyboard, Brazilian Portuguese
82G3279 1 Keyboard, Canadian French
1391526 1 Keyboard, Belgian French/Dutch
1391411 1 Keyboard, Finnish
1391407 1 Keyboard, Danish
1399583 1 Keyboard, Bulgarian
1395881 1 Keyboard, Swiss French
1385882 2 Keyboard, Swiss German
1391409 1 Keyboard, Norwegian
1391511 1 Keyboard, Dutch
1391410 1 Keyboard, Portuguese
1399046 1 Keyboard, Greek
1391408 1 Keyboard, Hebrew
1399581 1 Keyboard, Hungarian
1391407 1 Keyboard, Icelanic
1399580 1 Keyboard, Polish
1399582 1 Keyboard, Romanian
1399571 1 Keyboard, Slovakian
1399570 1 Keyboard, Czechoslovakian
1393286 1 Keyboard, Turkish (ID 179)
8125409 1 Keyboard, Turkish (ID 440)
8131596 1 Keyboard, Arabic
06H5286 1 Keyboard, Korean
1393990 1 Keyboard, Chinese
006H3048 1 Keyboard, United States (OEM)
2 11H4878 1 Mouse, 3-button

7-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Power Cables

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10 11

Index Part Number Country


1 1838574 Bahamas, Barbados, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Costa Rica,
Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Ecuador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Netherlands Antilles, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad, Tobago, U.S.A.
(except Chicago), Venezuela
2 6952300 Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan,
Korea (South), Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Trinidad,
Taiwan, U.S.A. (except Chicago), Venezuela
2 62X1045 Chicago, U.S.A.
3 6952311 Argentina, Australia, New Zealand
4 13F9979 Abu Dhabi, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Botswana, Egypt, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Indonesia, Korea (South),
Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Saudi Arabia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Turkey, Yugoslavia
5 13F9997 Denmark
6 14F0015 Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
7 14F0033 Bahrain, Bermuda, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Ghana,
Hong Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi,
Malaysia, Nigeria, Oman, People's Republic of China, Qatar,
Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Zambia

Chapter 7. Parts Information 7-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Index Part Number Country
8 14F0051 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
9 14F0069 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy
10 14F0087 Israel
11 6952291 Paraguay, Colombia, Uruguay

7-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures

Problem determination procedures are provided by power-on self-tests (POSTs),


service request numbers (SRNs), and maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs).
Some of these procedures use the using system service aids that are described in
“SSA Service Aids” on page 3-64.

Disk Drive Module Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs)

Attention: Disk drive modules are fragile. Handle them with care. Follow all
ESD-sensitive parts procedures when handling disk drive modules. For ESD
information, see “Handling Static–Sensitive Devices” on page 6-2.

The disk drive module POSTs start each time the module is switched on or when a
Send Diagnostic command is received from the SSA adapter. They check whether
the disk drive module is working correctly. The POSTs also help verify a repair after
a FRU has been exchanged.

There are two power-on self-tests: POST-1 and POST-2.

POST-1 runs immediately after the ‘power-on reset’ line goes inactive, and before
the disk drive module motor starts. POST-1 includes tests of the:
Ÿ Microprocessor
Ÿ ROM
Ÿ Safety circuits

If POST-1 completes successfully, POST-2 is enabled.

If POST-1 fails, the disk drive module check light stays on, and the disk drive module
is not configured into the SSA network.

POST-2 runs after the disk drive module motor has started. POST-2 includes tests
of:
Ÿ Motor control
Ÿ Servo control
Ÿ Read and write on the diagnostic cylinder (repeated for all heads)
Ÿ Error checking and correction (ECC)

If POST-2 completes successfully, the disk drive module is ready for use by the
using system.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Adapter Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs)

Two power-on self-tests (POSTs) are resident in the SSA adapter. The tests are
POST-1 and POST-2.

POST-1 tests all the functions that are necessary to enable the adapter to
communicate with the Micro Channel. POST-1 can fail for either of two reasons:
Ÿ A hardware error has been detected. In such instances, the POST code enters
a tight loop, and does not put the identification of the SSA adapter into the
programmable option select (POS) registers. If this error occurs, the SSA
adapter must be exchanged for a new one.
Ÿ The flash erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM) has a check sum
that is not valid. This error can be caused if the power fails while microcode is
being downloaded. In such instances, the POST checks all the hardware that is
needed to download the microcode. If all the hardware is correct, the POST sets
the ROS level to zero, puts the identification of the SSA adapter into POS 0-1,
and puts error data into the adapter status register.
To recover from this type of error, microcode must be downloaded to the SSA
adapter. If the using system can have an initial program load (IPL) without the
adapter, the configuration code detects the down-level ROS code and downloads
the latest level of code. The configuration code then uses control register bit 7 to
reset the adapter and restart POST-1.

If no error is detected during POST-1, the identification of the SSA adapter is put into
the POS registers, and POST-2 is started.

POST-2 tests the remaining hardware on the SSA adapter card and tests the other
FRUs that are attached to the adapter. If this test fails, an error code is saved and
sent to the using-system error log when the error logger becomes available. An
internal health check continues to send the error code at regular intervals.

A-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Request Numbers (SRNs)

Service request numbers (SRNs) are generated for the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive by
the system error-log analysis, system configuration code, diagnostics, and customer
problem-determination procedures. SRNs help you to identify the cause of a
problem, the failing field-replaceable units (FRUs), and the service actions that might
be needed to solve the problem.

The SRN Table

Table A-1 on page A-6 lists the SRNs and describes the actions you should
perform. The table columns are:
SRN The service reference number.
FRU list The FRU or FRUs that might be causing the problem (see also “FRU
Names Used in the SRN Table” on page A-5).
% How likely it is (by percentage) that the FRU is causing the problem.
Problem A description of the problem and the action you must take.

Abbreviations used in the table are:


DMA Direct memory access
FRU Field-replaceable unit
IOCC Input/output channel controller
POS Programmable option select (POS registers)
POST Power-on self-test
PAA P = adapter port number
AA = SSA address

Using the SRN Table


Important: You should have been sent here from “SSA Maintenance Analysis
Procedures (MAPs).” Do not start problem determination from the SRN table; always
go to “SSA Maintenance Analysis Procedures (MAPs)” on page 2-35 first.
1. Locate the SRN in the table. If you cannot find the SRN, you have a problem
with the diagnostics, the microcode, or the documentation. Call your support
center for assistance.
2. Read carefully the “Action” you must perform for the problem. Do not exchange
FRUs unless you are instructed to do so.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Normally exchange only one FRU at a time, starting from the top of the FRU list
for that SRN. Always use instructions given in the page reference when
exchanging FRUs. After each FRU is exchanged, go to "MAP 410: Repair
Checkout" in IBM RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems to
verify the repair.

A-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Software and Microcode Errors

Some SRNs indicate that a problem might have been caused by a software error or
by a microcode error. If you have one of these SRNs, perform the following actions:
1. Make a note of the contents of the error log for the device that has the problem.
2. Go to the using-system service aids and select Display Vital Product Data to
display the VPD of the failing system. Make a note of the VPD for all the SSA
adapters and disk drive modules.
3. Report the problem to your support center. The center can tell you whether you
have a known problem and can, if necessary, provide you with a correction for
the software or microcode.

FRU Names Used in the SRN Table

This section provides a glossary of the FRU names used.


FRU Name in Table Definition
Backplane assembly The disk drive modules, blank disk drive modules, and
internal SSA cables, are connected to the backplane
assembly.
Disk drive module A disk drive assembly to a carrier that plugs into the
backplane in the system unit.
Blank Disk drive module This module must be installed in a slot that does not
contain a disk drive module. This completes the SSA
loop through the system unit.
External SSA cable A cable that connects the bulkhead to the SSA adapter
or to an SSA subsystem.
Internal SSA cable Attaches the backplane to the SSA adapter card.
SSA adapter card The SSA adapter card, which is located in the using
system.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table A-1 (Page 1 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
10101 Disk drive module 100 Description: Disk drive motor stopped.
The disk drive module is bad.
Action: If this SRN was received by one
disk drive module only, then exchange
that disk drive module.
10112 None – Description: Format degraded. A format
operation has been ended before it has
completed.
Action: Use the Format service aid to
format the disk drive module.
1xxxx Disk drive module 100 Description: Disk drive module error.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
Note: In this SRN, an x represents a
digit from 0 to F.
20PAA Disk drive module 45 Description: An open SSA link has been
SSA adapter card External detected.
SSA Cables Action: Run the Link Verification service
Backplane assembly aid to isolate the failure. See “Link
Internal SSA Cable Verification Service Aid” on page 3-73. If
the SSA service aids are not available:
45
Ÿ When the failing device is an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to “SSA
Maintenance Analysis Procedures
6
(MAPs)” on page 2-35.
2
Ÿ When the failing device is not an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to the
service information for that device.
2

21PAA Disk drive module 45 Description: An SSA


to SSA adapter card threshold-exceeded-link error has been
29PAA External SSA Cables detected.
Backplane assembly Action: Run the Link Verification service
Internal SSA Cable aid to isolate the failure. See “Link
Verification Service Aid” on page 3-73. If
45 the SSA service aids are not available:
Ÿ When the failing device is an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to “SSA
6
Maintenance Analysis Procedures
2
(MAPs)” on page 2-35.
Ÿ When the failing device is not an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to the
service information for that device.
2

A-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table A-1 (Page 2 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
2A002 Disk drive module 50 Description: Async code 02 has been
SSA adapter card received. A software error has probably
occurred.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
any FRUs.
50
2A003 Disk drive module 50 Description: Async code 03 has been
SSA adapter card received. A software error has probably
occurred.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
any FRUs.
50
2A004 Disk drive module 50 Description: Async code 04 has been
SSA adapter card received. A software error has probably
occurred.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
any FRUs.
50
2A005 Backplane – Description: Async code 05 has been
received. This code indicates that a disk
drive module has detected a loss of
power.
Action: Use the Link Verification service
aid (see “Link Verification Service Aid” on
page 3-73) to determine if any devices
are missing from the SSA link.
Ÿ If a device is missing, go to “SSA
Maintenance Analysis Procedures
(MAPs)” on page 2-35 to isolate the
problem.
Ÿ If no device is missing, the problem
might have been caused by a
temporary, or partial, loss of power to
the SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table A-1 (Page 3 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
2A006 Disk drive module 70 Description: Async code 06 has been
Backplane received. This code indicates that a disk
drive module has detected the loss of one
of its power inputs.
Action:
Ÿ If the failing device is an SSA
30
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to “SSA
Maintenance Analysis Procedures
(MAPs)” on page 2-35, exchange the
disk drive module.
Ÿ If the failing device is not an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to the
service information for that device.
2A106 Backplane assembly 100 Description: Async code 06 has been
received. This code indicates that multiple
disk drive modules have detected the loss
of one of its their power inputs.
Action:
Ÿ If the failing devices are SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drives, exchange the
backplane.
Ÿ If the failing devices are not SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drives, go to the
service information for those devices.
2A206 Disk drive module 100 Description: A disk drive module has
detected that one of its SSA links has
failed the POSTs.
Action:
1. Use the Link Verification service aid
(see “Link Verification Service Aid” on
page 3-73) to determine where the
SSA link is broken.
2. Run diagnostics in the system
verification mode to the two disk drive
modules that are nearest to, and on
each side of, the place where the link
is broken. The diagnostics show
which disk drive module detected the
problem.
2FFFF None – Description: An async code that is not
valid has been received.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5.

A-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table A-1 (Page 4 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
300C0 Backplane 100 Description: A disk drive module has
detected the loss of one of its power
inputs.
Action:
Ÿ If the failing device is an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, exchange the
backplane.
Ÿ If the failing device is not an SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drive, go to the
service information for that device.
301C0 Backplane assembly 100 Description: Multiple disk drive modules
have detected the loss of one of their
power inputs.
Action:
Ÿ If the failing devices are SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drives, exchange the
backplane.
Ÿ If the failing devices are not SSA
Hot-Swap Disk Drives, go to the
service information for those devices.
303FF Disk drive module 100 Description: An SCSI status that is not
valid has been received.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
any FRUs.
40000 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The SSA adapter card has
failed.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
43PAA Disk drive module 90 Description: An SSA device on the link is
SSA adapter card preventing the completion of the link
configuration.
Action: If the SSA service aids are
available, run the Link Verification service
aid (see “Link Verification Service Aid” on
10 page 3-73) to determine which device is
preventing configuration. (That device is
the one beyond the last-configured device
on an open SSA link.)

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table A-1 (Page 5 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
44PAA Disk drive module 100 Description: A disk drive module has
failed.
Action: If the SSA service aids are
available, run the Link Verification service
aid (see “Link Verification Service Aid” on
page 3-73) to find the failing disk drive
module. Before you exchange the failing
disk drive module, run diagnostics in the
system verification mode to the module to
determine the cause of the problem.
45PAA Disk drive module 40 Description: The SSA adapter has
Backplane assembly detected an open SSA link. This problem
is caused either by a disk drive module
that is failing, or by a disk drive module
that has been switched off from another
using system on the same SSA link.
40 (That using system has itself been
20 switched off.)
Action: If the SSA service aids are
available, run the Link Verification service
aid (see “Link Verification Service Aid” on
page 3-73) to determine which device is
preventing configuration. (That device is
the one beyond the last-configured device
on an open SSA link.)
48000 None – Description: The SSA adapter has
detected a link configuration resource that
is not valid.
Action: See “SSA Loop Configurations
That Are Not Valid” on page A-15.
50000 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The SSA adapter failed to
respond to the device driver.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50001 SSA adapter card 100 Description: A data parity error has
occurred.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50002 SSA adapter card 100 Description: An SSA adapter direct
memory access (DMA) error has occurred.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50004 SSA adapter card 100 Description: A channel check has
occurred.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.

A-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table A-1 (Page 6 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
50005 SSA adapter card 100 Description: A software error has
occurred.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
the FRU.
50006 SSA adapter card 100 Description: A channel check has
occurred.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50007 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The input/output channel
controller (IOCC) detected an internal
error.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50008 SSA adapter card 100 Description: Unable to read or write the
POS registers.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
50010 SSA adapter card 100 Description: An SSA adapter or device
drive protocol error has occurred.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
the FRU.
50012 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The SSA adapter microcode
is in a suspended state.
Action: Run diagnostics in System
Verification mode to the SSA adapter.
Ÿ If the diagnostics fail, exchange the
FRU for a new FRU.
Ÿ If the diagnostics do not fail, go to
“Software and Microcode Errors” on
page A-5 before exchanging the FRU.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table A-1 (Page 7 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
50100 None – Description: An attempt was made to log
an error against a pdisk that is not
available to the using system.
Action: This problem has occurred for
one of the following reasons:
Ÿ A user has deleted a pdisk from the
system configuration. In such an
instance, the hdisk that is related to
the pdisk continues to operate
normally. If the disk drive module
tries to log an error, however, this
SRN (50100) is produced. Enter the
cfgmgr command to return the pdisk
to the system configuration.
Ÿ A disk drive module has tried to log an
error during system configuration. To
find the failing disk drive module, run
diagnostics to the disk drive modules
that are connected to this SSA
adapter.
60000 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The SSA adapter is missing
from the expected configuration.
Action: Verify that the SSA adapter card
is installed in the expected slot of the
using-system.
Ÿ If it is in the expected slot, exchange
the FRU for a new FRU.
Ÿ If it is not in the expected slot, enter
the diag -a command, and answer the
questions that are displayed.
7xxxx Disk drive module 80 Description: An SSA Hot-Swap Disk
Backplane assembly Drive module is missing from the expected
configuration of the SSA loop.
Action: Replace the FRUs one at a time.
Go to "MAP 410: Repair Checkout" in IBM
RS/6000 Diagnostic Information for
20 Multiple Bus Systems to verify each
repair.
D0000 Disk drive module 100 Description: The using system cannot
configure the disk drive module. This is
probably a software problem.
Action:
1. Try again to configure the disk drive
module.
2. If the problem remains, go to
“Software and Microcode Errors” on
page A-5 before exchanging the FRU.

A-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Table A-1 (Page 8 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
D0100 Disk drive module 100 Description: Unable to clear a disk drive
module reservation.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
D0101 Disk drive module 100 Description: The disk drive module has
been reserved since the diagnostics
started. The disk drive module is in use.
Action: Release the disk drive module,
and run the diagnostics again.
D0200 Disk drive module 100 Description: The disk drive module timed
out while the diagnostics were running.
Action: Rerun the diagnostics. If the
problem remains, exchange the FRU for a
new FRU.
D0300 Disk drive module 100 Description: The disk drive module failed
the diagnostic test.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
D0400 Disk drive module 100 Description: The disk drive module is not
ready while the diagnostics are running.
Action: Rerun the diagnostics. If the
problem remains, exchange the FRU for a
new FRU.
D0450 None – Description: A format operation is in
progress. The format operation that was
started on this disk drive module has not
yet finished. A format operation can take
up to 30 minutes to run.
Action: Wait for the format operation to
finish before you run the diagnostics
again. You can observe the progress of
the Format operation by running the
Format service aid again on this disk drive
module.
D0460 None – Description: A format operation has been
degraded. The format operation that was
started on this disk drive module did not
finish. Possibly, the disk drive module
was switched off while the format
operation was running.
Action: Run the Format service aid to
format this disk drive module.
D4000 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The diagnostics cannot
configure the SSA adapter.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table A-1 (Page 9 of 9). Service Request Numbers
SRN FRU List % Problem
D4100 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The diagnostics cannot open
the SSA adapter.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
D4300 SSA adapter card 100 Description: The diagnostics have
detected an SSA adapter POST failure.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
D44xx SSA adapter card 100 Description: The diagnostics have
detected that the SSA adapter has
corrupted the microcode, but cannot
download a new version of the microcode.
Action: Exchange the FRU for a new
FRU.
Note: In this SRN, an x represents a
digit 0 through F.
DFFFF SSA adapter card 100 Description: A command or parameter
that has been sent or received is not valid.
This problem is caused either by the SSA
adapter or by an error in the microcode.
Action: Go to “Software and Microcode
Errors” on page A-5 before exchanging
the FRU.

A-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


SSA Loop Configurations That Are Not Valid
Note: This section is related to SRN 48000.

SRN 48000 shows that the SSA loop contains more devices or adapters than are
allowed. The following condition exist: the loop contains more than 48 devices.

If the SRN occurred when either you or the customer switched on the using system:
1. Switch off the using system.
2. Review the configuration that you are trying to make, and determine why that
configuration is not valid.
3. Review “Rules for SSA Loops” on page 3-61.
4. Correct your configuration by reconfiguring the SSA cables or by removing the
excess devices or adapters from the loop.
5. Switch on the using system.

If the SRN occurred because additional devices or adapters were added to a working
SSA loop:
1. Remove the additional devices or adapters that are causing the problem, and put
the loop back into its original, working configuration.
Note: It is important that you perform these actions, because they enable the
configuration code to reset itself from the effects of the error.
2. Review “Rules for SSA Loops” on page 3-61.
3. Review the configuration that you are trying to make, and determine why that
configuration is not valid.
4. Correct your system to a valid configuration.

Appendix A. SSA Problem Determination Procedures A-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix B. Service Processor Menus

The Service Processor menus enable you to configure Service Processor options
and to enamle and disable functions.

Service Processor menus are available using an ASCII terminal when the server is
powered off and the Service Processor is operating with standby power. Service
Processor menus are also available when server power is on and the Service
Processor has detected a server problem (such as loss of surveillance).

During the first power up (i.e. power cord is plugged into the outlet), Service
Processor menus are not available for 45 seconds while the Service Processor is
running self-tests and initializing the server. If the server powers down, Service
Processor menus become available after 15 seconds.

For a summary of the Service Processor functions and the methods for invoking
them, see the table on page B-2.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Service Processor Functions Service Service SMS
Processor Processor (ASCII or
Menus Service graphics
(ASCII Aids terminals)
terminals) (ASCII or
graphics
terminals)
Read VPD Y3 Y3
View System Environmental Conditions Y3
Read System POST Errors Y3
Read Service Processor Error Logs Y3
View Progress Indicators from last Boot Y3
Power-on System Y3
Power-off System Y2
Read NVRAM Y2
Reset Service Processor Y2
Setup Reboot/Restart Policy Y2
Start Talk Mode Y2
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring Y2 Y1
2
Select Modem Line Speed Y Y1
Enable/Disable Modem Y2 Y1
Setup Modem Configuration Y2 Y1
2
Setup Ring Indicate Power-On Y Y1
Setup Dial-out Phone Numbers Y2 Y1
Setup Surveillance Y2 Y1
2
Update Service Processor Flash EPROM Y Y1 Y2
Change General Access Password Y2 Y2
Change Privileged Access Password Y2 Y2
Select Language Y2 Y2
2
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode Y Y2

1 Operating system root password


2 Privileged access password
3 General access (power-on) password

B-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Processor Menus

The Service Processor menus are divided into two groups:


Ÿ General user menus - the user must know the general access password.
Ÿ Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged access password.

The following section describes these two groups of menus, how to access them,
and the functions associated with each option.

When the server is powered down, the Service Processor menus may be accessed
locally or remotely.

Menu Inactivity
To prevent loss of control in unstable power environments, the Service Processor
leaves the menu mode after 5 minutes of inactivity. Menus may be resumed by
pressing any key on the terminal, local or remote.

How to access Service Processor menus locally

Service Processor menus may be accessed locally by connecting an ASCII terminal


to either serial port. Because the presence of the ASCII terminal cannot be
confirmed by the Service Processor, you must press a key on the ASCII terminal to
confirm its presence. Next the Service Processor prompts you for a password (if
set), and when verified, displays the Service Processor menus.

How to access Service Processor menus remotely

Service Processor menus may be accessed remotely by connecting a modem to


serial port 1 or serial port 2.
Ÿ Power off the server, unplug the power cord, and press the power button to drain
capacitance while power is disconnected.
Ÿ Connect the modem to the appropriate serial port and turn the modem on.
Ÿ Plug in the server.
Note: If your modem has not been configured, go to “CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP
MENU” on page B-16.

With a terminal or terminal emulator, call the server's modem. The Service
Processor prompts you for a password (if set), and when verified, displays the
Service Processor menus.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
General User Menus

The menu options presented to the General user are a subset of the options
available to the Privileged user. The user must know the General Access Password
in order to access these menus.

à ð
GENERAL USER MENU

1. Power-On System

2. Read VPD

3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot

4. Read Service Processor Error Logs

5. Read System POST Errors

6. View System Environmental Conditions

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Ÿ Power-On System
Allows the user to power-on the system.
Ÿ Read VPD
Displays manufacturer vital product data, such as serial numbers, part numbers,
etc.

B-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line
are the progress indicators from the boot that produced the current sessions.
Below the dashed line are progress indicators from the boot preceding the one
that produced the current sessions.
The progress indication codes are chronological from bottom to top. The dashed
line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.
Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays the Service Processor error logs.
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available
and are able to time stamp with local time. See B-35 for an example of the error
log.
Ÿ Read System POST Errors
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).
Your server may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this
error log when used with the diagnostics helps to isolate faults. See B-36 for an
example of the POST error screen.
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions
On selection of this menu, the Service Processor reads all environmental
sensors and reports the results to the user. This option maybe useful when
surveillance fails, as it allows the user to determine the environmental conditions
that may be related to the failure. See B-14 for an example of the System
Environmental Conditions screen.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Privileged User Menus

The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the
Privileged Access Password in order to access these menus.

MAIN MENU

At the top of the MAIN Menu is a listing containing:


Ÿ Your Service Processor's current firmware version
Ÿ The firmware copyright notice
Ÿ The System Name given to your server during setup

You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the
functions of your service processor.

The System Name, an optional field, is the name your server reports in problem
messages. This name helps your support team, (for example, your system
administrator, network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly
identify the location, configuration, and history of your server. The System Name is
set from the Main Menu using option 6.

B-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the Main
Menu example that follows is example information only.

à ð
Service Processor Firmware
EPROM: 1997ð915
FLASH: 1997ð512
Copyright 1997, IBM Corporation
SYSTEM NAME

MAIN MENU

1. Service Processor Setup Menu

2. System Power Control Menu

3. System Information Menu

4. Language Selection Menu

5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu

6. Set System Name

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Service Processor SETUP MENU

à ð
Service Processor SETUP MENU

1. Change Privileged Access Password

2. Change General Access Password

3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:


Currently Disabled

4. Start Talk Mode

5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu

6. Reset Service Processor

7. Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Note
Unless otherwise stated in menu responses settings become effective when a
menu is exited using option 98 or 99.

B-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Passwords

Passwords can be any combination of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. You can


enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first 8
characters. Passwords can be set from the Service Processor menu or from the
SMS menus.

For security purposes, the Service Processor counts the number of attempts to enter
correct passwords. The results of not recognizing a correct password within this
error threshold are different, depending on whether the attempts are being made
locally (at the server) or remotely (via a modem). The error threshold is 3.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the
Service Processor exits the menus. This action is taken based on the assumption
that the server is in an adequately secure location with only authorized users having
access. Such users must still successfully enter a login password to access AIX.

If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the


Service Processor disconnects the modem to prevent potential security attacks on
the server by unauthorized remote users.

The following illustrates what you can access with the Privileged Access Password
and the General Access Password.

Privileged General Resulting Menu


Access Access
Password Password
None None MAIN MENU displayed
None Set MAIN MENU displayed
Set None User's with password see the MAIN MENU
Others users see the GENERAL USER MENU
Set Set Users see menus associated with the entered password

Ÿ Change Privileged Access Password


Set or change the Privileged Access Password. It provides the user with the
capability to access all Service Processor functions. This password is usually
used by the system administrator or root user.
Ÿ Change General Access Password
Set or change the General Access Password. It provides limited access to
Service Processor menus, and is usually available to all users who are allowed
to power-on the server.
Ÿ Enable/Disable Console Mirroring
Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When Console Mirroring is enabled, the Service Processor sends information to
both serial ports. This capability may be enabled by local or remote users. This
provides local users the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console mirroring
may be enabled for the current session only. For more information, see “Console
Mirroring” on page B-32.
Ÿ Start Talk Mode
In a console mirroring session, it is useful for those that are monitoring the
session to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting this menu item
activates the keyboards and displays for such communications while console
mirroring is established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is
possible. Alternating messages between users works best.

B-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Ÿ Surveillance Setup Menu
This option may be used to setup operating system surveillance.

à ð
OS Surveillance Setup Menu

1. Surveillance:
Currently Disabled

2. Surveillance Time Interval:


Currently 5

3. Surveillance Delay:
Currently 1ð

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
– Surveillance
May be set to Enabled or Disabled.
– Surveillance Time Interval:
May be set to any number from 2 to 255 minutes.
– Surveillance Delay:
May be set to any number from 0 to 255 minutes.
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page B-29 for
more information about surveillance.
Ÿ Reset Service Processor - Allows the user to reinitialize the Service Processor.
Ÿ Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM - This is an automatic process.
An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the
Internet or from your service team. The Internet address is:
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro
The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should
format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.
Reformatting is worth the time and effort. When this process is selected, you are
prompted to place the diskette into the drive and to indicate to the system that
the diskette in available and the automatic process starts. If the system has other
needs, you are prompted. See “Service Processor Firmware Updates” on
page B-33 for additional information and update methods.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU

à ð
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU

1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:


Currently Disabled

2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu

3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

4. Power-On System

5. Power-Off System

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Ÿ Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode
This option may be used to instruct Service Processor to immediately power-on
the server after a power failure, bypassing power-on password verification.
Unattended Start Mode can also be set via SMS Menus. It is intended to be
used on servers that require automatic power-on after a power failure.
Ÿ Ring Indicator Power-On Menu
Ring Indicate Power-On is an alternate method of dialing in, without establishing
a Service Processor session. If the system is powered off, Ring Indicate
Power-On is enabled, the server is powered on at the predetermined number of
rings, If the server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone
call is not answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server
powered-on. The Ring Indicator Power-On Menu and defaults are shown
below:

à ð
Ring Indicator Power-On Menu

1. Ring Indicate Power-On :


Currently Disabled
2. Number of Rings :
Currently 6

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ

B-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


– Ring Indicate Power-On may be set to 'Enabled' or 'Disabled'.
– Number of Rings may be set to any number from 1 to 255.
Ÿ Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu, see “Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu”
on page B-23.
Ÿ Power-on System
Lets you power-on the system immediately. For other power-on methods see
“System Power-On Methods” on page B-26.
Ÿ Power-off System
Allows the user to power-off the server following a surveillance failure.

SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU

à ð
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU

1. Read VPD

2. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot

3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot

4. Read Service Processor Error Logs

5. Read System POST Errors

6. Read NVRAM

7. View System Environmental Conditions

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Ÿ Read VPD
Displays manufacturer's vital product data, such as serial numbers, part
numbers, etc.
Ÿ Read VPD Image from Last System Boot
Displays the VPD information that was in effect after the last system boot. This
information will usually be identical with the results from the menu selection
"Read VPD," but in the case of configuration updates or certain faults, this

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
historical comparison can be useful to System Administrators and service
personnel.
Ÿ Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot
Displays the boot progress indicators (check points), up to a maximum of 100,
from the system boot prior to the one in progress now. This historical
information may be useful to help diagnose system faults.
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line
are the progress indicators from the boot that produced the current sessions.
Below the dashed line are progress indicators from the boot preceding the one
that produced the current sessions.
The progress indication codes are chronological from bottom to top. The dashed
line merely represents the point where the latest boot started.
Ÿ Read Service Processor Error Logs
Displays error conditions detected by the Service Processor.
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available
and are able to time stamp with local time. See B-35 for an example of the error
log.
Ÿ Read System POST Errors
Selecting this item lets you review the results of the POST (Power-On Self Test).
Your server may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is
sufficient working system resources. If POST errors occur during start-up, this
error log when used with the diagnostics helps to isolate faults. See B-36 for an
example of the POST error screen.
Ÿ Read NVRAM
Displays Non-Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) content.
Ÿ View System Environmental Conditions
The Service Processor reads all environmental sensors and reports the results to
the user. This option is most useful when surveillance fails, as it allows the user
to determine the environmental conditions that may be related to the failure.
The following is an example of system environment conditions:

B-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


à System Environmental Conditions
ð
(System Power is currently off.)

Fan ð: A stopped fan detected


Fan 1: A stopped fan detected
Fan 2: A stopped fan detected
Fan 3: A stopped fan detected
MEM Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
I/O Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
CPU Temperature is operating within normal tolerances
5.ð Volts: A low 5.ð Voltage reading detected
3.3 Volts: A low 3.3 Voltage reading detected
5.ð Standby Volts: is operating within normal tolerance
+12.ð Volts: A low +12.ð voltage reading detected
-12.ð Volts: A high -12.ð voltage reading detected
(Press Return to Continue)
á ñ
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU

à ð
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU

1. English

2. Francais

3. Deutsch

4. Italiano

5. Espanol

6. Svenska

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set in order to
properly display languages other than English.

This menu allows selecting languages into which Service Processor and system
firmware menus and messages are displayed.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU

à ð
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU

1. Modem Configuration Menu

2. Serial Port Selection Menu

3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

4. Telephone Number Setup Menu

5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu

6. Customer Account Setup Menu

7. Call-Out Test

8. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu

98. Return to Previous Menu

99. Exit from Menus

á ñ
Ÿ Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu.”
Ÿ Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page B-17.
Ÿ Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on
page B-18.
Ÿ Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page B-20.
Ÿ Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on
page B-22.
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On Menu, see on page B-12.

Modem Configuration Menu

The first two lines of the Modem Configuration Menu are status lines showing the
current selections. Selections are made in the two section labeled Modem Ports and
Modem Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you that you want to
activate and then select the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. If
you wish to set up both serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a
time.

B-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem
Configuration Files” on page D-1 and “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on
page D-6.

à ð
Modem Configuration Menu

Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:


Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:

To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file
name

Modem Ports:
1. Serial port 1
2. Serial port 2

Modem Configuration File Name:


3. modem_f_sp
4. modem_fð_sp
5. modem_f1_sp
6. modem_z_sp
7. modem_zð_sp
8. none

9. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Serial Port Selection Menu

à ð
Serial Port Selection Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:


Currently Disabled

2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:


Currently Disabled

3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:


Currently Disabled

4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:


Currently Disabled

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
You may enable and/or disable the call-in and call-out functions of each serial port in
any combination.

Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

à ð
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu

1. Serial Port 1 Speed:


Currently 96ðð

2. Serial Port 2 Speed:


Currently 96ðð

98. Return to Previous Menu


á ñ
Serial port speed can be set for terminal performance or to accommodate modem
capabilities. A speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. Valid serial port
speeds are shown below:

50 600 4800
75 1200 7200
110 1800 9600
134 2000 19200
150 2400 38000
300 3600 57600
115200

Telephone Number Setup Menu

This menu may be used to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a
system failure. The Service Processor allows setting or changing telephone numbers
for:
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number: - The telephone number of the maintenance
provider's computer.
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number: - The telephone number of
the local system support provider's computer.
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number: The number for a pager carried by someone
who will respond to problem calls from your server.
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number: - The telephone number service personnel
will use to reach the system user.
Ÿ Customer System Telephone Number: - The telephone number to which the
server's modem is connected.

B-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


à ð
Telephone Number Setup Menu

1. Service Center Telephone Number:


Currently Unassigned

2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:


Currently Unassigned

3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:


Currently Unassigned

4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:


Currently Unassigned

5. Customer System Telephone Number:


Currently Unassigned

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Ÿ Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center
computer. The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from
servers with call-out capability. This computer is referred to as "the catcher."
The catcher expects messages in a specific format to which Service Processor
conforms. For more information about the format and catcher computers, refer
to the README file in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact your
service provider for the correct telephone number to enter here. Until you have
that number, leave this field blank.
Ÿ Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the
System Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls
from servers. Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone
number to enter here. Until you have that number, leave this field blank.
Ÿ Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a pager carried by
someone who will respond to problem calls from your server. Contact your
administration center representative for the correct telephone number to enter
here. For test purposes, enter your telephone number here. You can change it
later when testing is complete.
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging
function. Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error
message when they do not get the expected response from another
modem. Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error
message will cause the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place
pager calls for the number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup
Menu. These retries result in redundant pages.
Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
For digital pagers that require a personal Identification Number (PIN) for access,
include the PIN in this field as in the following example:
1 8ðð 123 4567,,,,87654
where the commas create pauses1 for the voice response system, and the
87654 represents the PIN.
Ÿ Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near
the server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the
telephone number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, enter your
telephone number here. You can change it after testing is completed.
Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your
server's modem is connected. The service or administration center
representatives need this number to make direct contact with your server for
problem investigation. This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.

Call-Out Policy Setup Menu

à ð
CALL-OUT POLICY SETUP MENU

1. Call-Out policy (First/All):


Currently First

2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):


Currently 12ð

3. Remote latency, (in seconds):


Currently 2

4. Number of retries:
Currently 2

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Ÿ Call Out policy may be set to 'first' or 'all'. If call out policy is set to 'first', the
Service Processor will stop at the first successful call out to one of the following
numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Admin Center
3. Pager

1 The length of these pauses is set in modem register S8. The default is usually 1 or 2 seconds each.

B-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


If call out policy is set to 'all', the Service Processor will attempt a call out to all
the following numbers in the order listed:
1. Service Center
2. Customer Admin Center
3. Pager
Remote timeout and Remote latency are functions of your service provider's
catcher computer. You should take the defaults or contact your service provider
for recommended settings.
Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that
resulted in busy signals or other error messages.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Customer Account Setup Menu

à ð
Customer Account Setup Menu

1. Customer Account Number:


Currently Unassigned

2. Customer RETAIN Login UserID:


Currently Unassigned

3. Customer RETAIN Login Password:


Currently Unassigned

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Ÿ Customer Account Number is assigned by your service provider for record
keeping and billing. If you have an account number, enter it here. Otherwise,
leave this field blank.
Ÿ Customer RETAIN Login UserID and Customer RETAIN Login Password
apply to a service function to which your service provider may or may not have
access. Leave these fields blank if your service provider does not use RETAIN.

B-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the
operating system process.

Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.

à ð
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu

1. Number of reboot attempts:


Currently 3

2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?


Currently Yes

3. Enable supplemental restart policy?


Currently No

4. Call-Out before restart:


Currently Disabled

98. Return to Previous Menu

á ñ
Ÿ Number of reboot attempts if the server fails to successfully complete the boot
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal
to or greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboots attempts count, not
reboots that occur after a restart attempt. At restart, the counter is set to 0.
Ÿ Use OS-Defined restart policy lets the Service Processor react or not react the
same as the operating system to major system faults, by reading the setting of
the operating system parameter Automatically Restart/Reboot After a System
Crash. This parameter may, or may not be defined depending on the operating
system or its version/level. If the operating system automatic restart setting is
defined, then it may be set to respond to a major fault by restarting or by not
restarting. See your operating system documentation for details on setting up
operating systems automatic restarts. The default value is YES.
Ÿ Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is NO. If set to YES,
the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO
OR

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-23


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system
has NO automatic restart policy.
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page B-27.
Ÿ Call-Out before restart (Enabled/Disabled) If a restart is necessary due to a
system fault, you can enable the Service Processor to call out and report the
event. This item is valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive,
signalling a bigger problem.

Service Processor Functions and Features

The following section discusses some of the Service Processor functions and
features more fully.

The RS/6000 7025 F50 Series supports the following functions:

Built-in Functions Initialization and Test Service Processor Basic


Instructions Test (BIST)
JTAG System Chip
Initialization
Error Data Collection BIST/POST errors and status
Checkstop FIR data logout
Machine check logout
Configuration CPU Complex validation
VPD Collection
System Management Reset and Reboot on System
Firmware fail
Reboot on system failure

B-24 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Local User Function User Interface Local async console
Text based menus with NLS
Operator Panel messages
Power and Miscellaneous Power On/Off
Configurable Reboot Policy
Status and Data Access VPD
Error data (Service Processor)
Error data (system)
Environmental data
Service Processor Setup Passwords
Utilities
Phone numbers
Language (NLS) selection
Call In/Call Out enable/disable
Flash (Gold/Recovery block)
Update
Flash (Composite block)
Update
System Name
Modem Configuration
Remote User Functions Call Out (Call Home) Boot failure
Reporting
OS Termination
Surveillance failure
Critical EPOW reporting
Checkstop
Machine check
Indentify system by name Call In
Power-on via ring-indicate
Password/security check
Console mirroring/Quick
disconnect
Application Interface Functions Monitor/Sense Thermal/Voltage/fan speed
SP Flash Update(Recovery
and Composite)

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-25


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System Power-On Methods
Ÿ Power-on Switch - see 'Starting the System Unit' in &ugtitle..
Ÿ SP Menu power-on request
You can request a power-on via the Service Processor menus from either a local
or remote terminal.
If a remote terminal is to be used, the modem must be connected to serial port
1, and the operating system set up to enable a TTY login session on that port.
Refer to “Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session” on page D-6 for information
on transferring modem sessions from Service Processor to the operating system.
Ÿ Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on
page B-12.
The Service Processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of AC power
(see Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER
CONTROL MENU). When AC power is restored, the system returns to the then
current power state at the time AC loss occurred. For example, if the system
was powered-on when AC loss occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is
restored. If the system was powered-off when AC loss occurred, it remains off
when power is restored.
Ÿ Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.
Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can
operate a timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set
the timer so that your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down.
The timer is battery operated, so power interruptions occurring while the server is
off do not affect its accuracy. Refer to the shutdown -t command of AIX for
details on setting the timer.
Because of the potential for AC power loss, the Timed Power-On function of AIX
can only be assured when Unattended Power-On Mode is enabled. If a Timed
Power-On event occurs during an AC power loss, and if Unattended Power-On
Mode is enabled, the system starts when AC power is restored.
If Unattended Start Mode is disabled (the default), the system power state
remains off when AC power is restored, regardless of the power state of the
system when AC loss occurred.
Ÿ Ring Indicate Power-On
Enabling ring indicate power-on disables remote call-in. If ring indicate power-on
is enabled, the server will power on at a predetermined number of rings. If the
server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not
answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server powered on.

B-26 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Ÿ Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt
The Service Processor will initiate a power-on sequence upon detection of a
failed boot attempt.

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery

Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,
from a system reset or power on. The boot process ends when control passes to the
operating system process.

Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.

Failure During Boot Process: During the boot process, either initially after
system power-on or upon reboot after a system failure, the Service Processor (SP)
monitors the boot progress (via surveillance). If progress stops, the Service
Processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The Service
Processor can re-attempt this process according to an entry on the Reboot/Restart
Policy Setup Menu.

Failure During Normal System Operation: When the boot process completes
and control transferers to the operating system (OS), the Service Processor can
monitor operating system activity (see the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU
item Set Surveillance Parameters). If OS activity stops, the Service Processor can
initiate a reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see OS
documentation).

If the operating system is AIX, the menu item under SMIT for setting the restart
policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash (True/False), and the default is False.
When the setting is True, and if the SP parameter, Use OS-Defined Restart Policy, is
Yes (the default), the Service Processor takes over for AIX to reboot/restart after a
Check Stop or Surveillance failure.

Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls: The operating system's


automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation) indicates the OS
response to a system crash. The SP can be instructed to refer to that policy, or not,
by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy menu item.

If the operating system has no automatic restart policy, or if it is disabled, then the
Service Processor restart policy can be controlled from the Service Processor Menus
by using the Enable Supplemental Restart Policy selection.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-27


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Use OS-Defined restart policy?: The Use OS-Defined restart policy default
setting is YES. This causes the SP to refer to the OS Automatic Restart Policy
setting and take action, the same action the OS would take if it could have
responded to the problem causing the restart.

When this setting is NO, or if the OS did not set a policy, the Service Processor
refers to Enable supplemental restart policy for its action.

Enable Supplemental Restart Policy?: The default setting is NO. If set to


YES, the Service Processor restarts the system when the system loses control as
detected by the Service Processor surveillance, and either:
1. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to NO
OR
2. The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to YES and the operating system has
NO automatic restart policy.
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page B-27.

The following provides a more thorough understanding of the relations among the
OS and Service Processor restart controls:

OS Automatic SP to use SP Enable System response


reboot/restart OS-Defined supplemental
after crash setting restart policy? restart policy?
None No No±
None No Yes Restarts
None Yes± No±
None Yes± Yes Restarts
False² No No±
False² No Yes Restarts
False² Yes± No±
False² Yes± Yes
True No No±
True No Yes Restarts
True Yes± No± Restarts
True Yes± Yes Restarts

1 Service Processor default


2 AIX default

B-28 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance

Surveillance is a function in which the Service Processor monitors the system, and
the system monitors the Service Processor. This monitoring is accomplished by
periodic samplings called heartbeats.

Surveillance is available during two phases:


1. System firmware bringup (automatic) and
2. Operating system runtime (optional).

System Firmware Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means


to detect boot failures while the system firmware is running.

System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It


cannot be disabled via a user selectable option.

If the Service Processor detects no heartbeats during system IPL (for 7 minutes), it
cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries is set
from the Service Processor menus. If the fail condition repeats, the Service
Processor leaves the machine powered on, logs an error and offers menus to the
user. If Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure and
displays the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.

Operating System Surveillance: Provides the Service Processor with a means


to detect hang conditions, hardware or software failures while the operating system is
running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect the Service
Processor failure by the lack of a return heartbeat.

Operating system surveillance is disabled by default. This is to allow the user to run
operating systems that do not support this Service Processor option.

Operating system surveillance can be enabled and disabled via:


Ÿ service processor Menus
Ÿ service processor Service Aids

Three parameters must be set for operating system surveillance:


1. Surveillance enable/disable
2. Surveillance interval
This is the maximum time in minutes the Service Processor should wait for a
heartbeat from the operating system before timeout.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-29


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Surveillance delay
This is the length of time in minutes for the Service Processor to wait from when
the operating system is started to when the first heartbeat is expected.

Surveillance will take effect immediately after setting the parameters from the Service
Processor menus.

If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control
to the operating system), and the Service Processor does not detect any heartbeats
from the operating system, the Service Processor assumes the system is hung. The
machine is left powered on and the Service Processor enters standby phase,
displaying the operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel. If
Call-out is enabled, the Service Processor calls to report the failure.

B-30 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Call Out (Call-Home)

The Service Processor can call out (Call-Home) when it detects one of the following
conditions:
Ÿ System firmware surveillance failure.
Ÿ Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by Operating System).
Ÿ Critical environmental failures.
Ÿ Restarts

To enable the call out feature, you need to do the following:


Ÿ Have a modem connected to serial port 1 or 2.
Ÿ Set up the following using the Service Processor Menus or Diagnostic Service
Aids:
– Enable call out for the serial port where the modem is connected.
– Set up serial port line speed.
– Enter the modem configuration filename.
– Set up site specific parameters (i.e. phone numbers for call out,
call out policy, etc).
Ÿ To call out before restart, set “Call-Out before restart” to ENABLED from the
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging
function. Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error
message when they do not get the expected response from another modem.
Therefore, even though the paging was successful, the error message will
cause the Service Processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the
number of retries specified in the Call-Out policy Setup Menu. These retries
result in redundant pages.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-31


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Console Mirroring

Console mirroring allows a person on a local ASCII terminal to monitor the Service
Processor activities of a remote user. Console mirroring ends when the Service
Processor releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.

System Configuration:
Ÿ Service Processor
Ÿ Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls
Ÿ Local ASCII terminal connected to the other serial port. This local terminal may
be connected directly to your server or connected through another modem.

There are two scenarios in which console mirroring can be invoked:


1. Remote session first, then local session added
a. Remote session already in progress.
b. Remote user uses the Service Processor menus to enable console mirroring,
allowing both consoles to be active.
2. Local session first, then remote session added
a. Local session is already in progress.
b. The Service Processor receives a call from the remote user.
c. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The Service
Processor immediately begins mirroring Service Processor menus.
Note: A quick disconnect is accomplished by hitting the key sequence Ctrl+D on
either console. Both sessions will exit the Service Processor menus.

B-32 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Service Processor Firmware Updates

The Service Processor EPROM may need to be updated for two different reasons:
1. The UPDATE (composite) portion of the EPROM has become corrupted.
2. The Service Processor firmware upgrades, without any corruption present.

The use of a Flash EPROM allows updates to occur without physically replacing the
memory.

The firmware in your server can be updated using one of four available initiation
processes:
1. Service Processor initiation
2. SMS Utilities initiation
3. Service Aids initiation
4. AIX initiation.
Each initiation method is described below. In each case, the process prompts you
for your authority and shows the contents of the update media. Verify the file with
which to perform the update, and follow any other instructions that may appear.
After initiation, the processes are identical and automatic.

There are two areas in each firmware module that may need updating:
1. The gold code or base code or EPROM area
2. The custom or main program or FLASH area

Each update file contains matching gold and custom firmware, so it is not possible to
update to a conflicting set.

Before the update process begins, the versions of each of the two areas of the target
firmware module are compared to the versions on the update diskette. Only the
area(s) that need updating are updated. In most cases, only the custom area is
updated.

An update diskette can be acquired from the RS/6000 Support page on the Internet
or from your service team. The Internet address is:
http://www.rs6ððð.ibm.com/support/micro

The update files must be downloaded to a DOS-formatted diskette. You should


format the diskette just prior to receiving the download, to be sure it is clean.
Reformatting is worth the time and effort.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-33


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Refer to the downloaded update instructions, or to the System Management Services
“Config” on page 5-5 or “Display Configuration” on page 5-26 or Service Processor
menus on page B-7, to determine the level of the system unit or service processor
flash.

Updating Firmware from the Service Processor Menus: The Service Processor Menus
are available while the server is powered off. From the Service Processor Main
Menu, select Service Processor Setup to bring up a menu containing the item,
Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM. Selecting that item starts the update
process. The process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the
first diskette and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the
process requires user assistance, it is requested.

Updating Firmware from the SMS Utilities: From a powered down or reset condition,
bring up the SMS Utilities and select the menu item for updating firmware. The
process requests the update diskette(s) as needed. After inserting the first diskette
and informing the system, the process continues automatically. If the process
requires user assistance, it is requested.

Updating Firmware from the Service Aids


Note: This service aid is only supported for Online Diagnostics.: This service aid
allows you to update the system or service processor flash.

Additional update and recovery instructions may be provided; also you need to know
the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file. If the flash
update image file is on a diskette, you need the AIX DOS utilities package to process
the diskette. You can use the dosdir command to find out the name of the update
image file. This service aid uses the dosread command to put the file into the /var
file system.

Using this service aid to update the system or service processor flash will not save
the current contents of the flash.

The flash image file will be copied in the /var file system. If there is not enough
space in the /var file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If
this occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file system and retry the
service aid. After the file is copied, a warning screen will ask for confirmation to
continue the flash update. Continuing the flash update will eventually cause the
system to reboot and return to the AIX login prompt. After the system unit reboots,
the file /var/update_flash_image can be removed to conserve space in the /var file
system.

B-34 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Updating Firmware from AIX

You must delete the file /var/update_flash_image before proceeding.

The flash update image file must have already been placed in the /var file system.
This could have been done with a file transfer from another server or with the
dosread command of the AIX DOS Utilities, for example. With the flash update
image in place, issuing the following AIX command
shutdown -u /var/\filename\.img
initiates the update process. Where *filename* is the name of the flash update
image. During the process, the server powers down and reboots. You know the
process is complete when the login prompt reappears.

Service Processor Logs

Service Processor Error Log: The Service Processor error logs contain error
conditions detected by the Service Processor.

à ð
Error Log

1997ð626223337 ð. Loss of Redundant Fan #5


4ð21ðð91

Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue. >
á ñ
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), a.k.a.
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available and
are able to time stamp with local time.

Appendix B. Service Processor Menus B-35


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
System POST Errors: If POST (Power-On Self Test) errors occur during
start-up, this error log help isolate faults when used with the diagnostics.

à ð
Read System POST Errors

Version : ð
Severity : ð
Disposition : ð
Initiator : ð
Event being reported : ð
Extended Error Log Data:
ðxC2 ðxðð ðx84 ðxð9 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðx2ð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðx72 ðx74
ðx63 ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðxðð ðxðð ðx28 ðxð3 ðxðð ðxð5 ðxðð ðxð1
ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð ðxðð
ðx49 ðx42 ðx4D ðxðð ðx55 ðx3ð ðx2E ðx31
ðx2D ðx5ð ðx31 ðx2D ðx58 ðx31 ðxðð

(Press Return to Continue)

á ñ

B-36 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test

For your convenience, here is an example Service Processor setup checklist. It is


basic. Your setup may include more or less of the available features, so you may
wish to adjust this checklist for your own application. This checklist will at least
provide you with a starting place.

Service Processor Setup Checklist


1. Unplug the power cord from the server.
2. Attach a local terminal for this setup procedure.
3. Plug in the server and power on the local terminal.
Attention:Server power should remain off.
4. Bring up the Service Processor Menus, see Appendix B, “Service Processor
Menus” on page B-1.
5. Set the System Name, “Privileged User Menus” on page B-6.
6. Enable Surveillance, see B-8, and “Service Processor Functions and Features”
on page B-24
7. Configure Call-In/Call-Out, see “CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU” on
page B-16 and “Modem Configuration Menu” on page B-16.
8. Exit the Service Processor menus
9. Unplug the power cord from the server.
10. Attach modem(s) (if needed), page B-3
11. Plug in the server
Attention: Server power should remain off.
12. Test
Call-In, page C-2
Call-Out, page C-2
13. Backup the service processor settings, as described in 'Save or Restore
Hardware Management Policies Service Aid' in &ugtitle..
Note: This is strongly recommended to protect the usefulness of the service
processor and the availability of the server.

Your Service Processor is ready to go to work.

Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test C-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Testing the Setup

The following is a sample procedure to assure your setup is working.

These tests include communicating with the server operating system. Be sure the
necessary serial port(s) is configured. If you need assistance, refer to “Serial Port
Configuration” on page C-3.

The server should be powered off as a result of the “Service Processor Setup
Checklist” on page C-1.

Call-In:
1. Go to your remote terminal and call-in to your server. Your server should
answer and offer you the Service Processor Main Menu after requesting your
privileged access password.
2. Enter item 2, System Power Control Menu.
3. Enter item 4, Power-On System.
Answer "y" when asked if you wish to continue powering on the system.
4. After the system firmware and operating system have initialized the server, the
login prompt should appear at your remote terminal if you set up seamless
modem transfer (refer to page D-6 for more information). This may take several
minutes. When this occurs, you have successfully called into the Service
Processor.
5. Type logout to disconnect from the operating system. The message "No
Carrier" displays on your remote terminal.
6. Call your server again. The operating system should answer and offer you the
login prompt.
If these tests are successful, call-in is working.
7. Login in and command your server to shutdown and power off. (The AIX
command shutdown -F will do this.)
8. The message "No Carrier" displays on your remote terminal.

Call-Out:

During the setup, you entered your phone number for the Pager (on page B-19) and
Customer Voice (on page B-20) phone numbers. These numbers are used for this
test.
1. Your remote terminal should be disconnected as a result of the Call-In test.

C-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Call your server again.
3. At the Service Processor Main Menu, select Call-In/Call-Out Setup menu, then
select Call-Out test. This causes a simulated error condition for the purposes of
this test.
4. After a few moments, a message appears regarding an illegal entry. Press Enter
to clear the message and return to the main menu.
5. When your telephone rings, answer the call. You should hear the sound of a
telephone being dialed. This is your computer trying to page you.

If this test is successful, call-out is working.

You now need to go back through the “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on
page B-18 to enter the actual telephone numbers your server will use for reporting
problems.

Serial Port Configuration

To configure the serial port on an AIX system, enter the following commands from an
AIX console:
1. Log in as root.
2. To find if you have any serial ports already configured, enter:
lsdev -Cc tty
If no serial ports are configured, none are listed. If you wish to configure serial
ports that are not listed, continue with the remaining steps.
3. Identify the serial port(s) with the modem(s).
4. Enter
smit tty
5. Select add tty
6. Select RS232
7. Select Baud rate 96ðð or higher.
8. Select login enable and set the flow control to RTS.
9. Commit the selections and set up any other needed serial ports.
10. Exit SMIT.

Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test C-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
C-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix D. Modem Configurations

Sample Modem Configuration Files

With nearly 1000 modems to choose from, and various programming standards,
configuring a modem for use with the Service Processor can be challenging. The
Service Processor is designed to place little demand on an attached modem, thereby
increasing the setup and connection success rates. Several sample modem
configurations files are supplied that will either work directly with your modem, or
provide a good starting point for a custom setup, if required. These files are included
on the Sample Modem Configuration Files diskette and in your Service Processor
firmware with the following names:

Diskette File Name Service Processor Firmware File Name


modem_z.cfg modem_z.sp
modem_z0.cfg modem_z0.sp
modem_f.cfg modem_f.sp
modem_f0.cfg modem_f0.sp
modem_f1.cfg modem_f1.sp

The sample modem configuration files can be found in the /usr/share/modems


subdirectory, if your server is using AIX. A listing of each file is included at the end
of this appendix.

With the following selection procedures and your modem manual, one of these
configuration files should be suitable for your use.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Configuration File Selection
1. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?
If yes, go to 3
If not, continue with 2 below.
2. Does your modem respond to:
a. ATZ reset command, or
b. ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended.
If ATZn, configuration file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.
If yes, go to 5 on page D-3
If not, continue with 3 below.
3. Does your modem command set include a test for v.42 error correction at the
remote modem (often called "Auto-Reliable Mode")?
If yes, and enabled is the default, this test must be disabled. See “Customizing
the Modem Configuration Files” on page D-3 for more information.
If not, continue with 4 on page D-3.

D-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. Does your modem respond to:
a. AT&F reset command, or
b. AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, etc.?
If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended.
If AT&Fn, configuration file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended,
depending on which provides the hardware flow control profile.
5. Selection is complete. If you find it necessary to adjust any of these
configuration files, do so with reference to the manual that came with your
modem.1 Choose settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.

Examples

Modem Setup Z Setup Z0 Setup F Setup F0 Setup F1


(Rare)
*
AT&T DataPort 2001 X
Bocamodem 1440E X
Hayes Smart Modem 300 X
IBM 5841 X
IBM 5843 X
IBM 7851 X
IBM 7852-010 X
IBM 7855 X
USRobotics X
33.6K Sportster
Zoom V.32 X

*Ring interrupt only on first ring.

Customizing the Modem Configuration Files

You can create your own modem configuration file(s) or modify the samples
provided. After you customize your modem configuration files, you MUST access
them via the Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the
Service Processor menus.

1 Some older modems do not respond to the commands Xð or &R1. You should edit out these
commands from the modem configuration file if yours is such a modem. See your modem manual for
more information.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Note: If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, specify your customized
modem configuration files from the service aid.

If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and
telephone numbers from the Service Processor menus, you may set them up with
the service aids while you specify your customized modem configuration files.

To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model to modify.
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.
2. Copy /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg to make a new file with the name (for
example) modem_fx.cfg.
3. In modem_fx.cfg, change the line Send "ATEðT\r" to Send "ATcccEðT\r" where
ccc is the added command found in your modem manual.
Make this change to the third line of each of the following stanzas:
Ÿ condout
Ÿ condin
Ÿ ripo
4. Save the changes.

Use this new modem configuration file as described at the top of this section.

Xon/Xoff Modems

Some modems of the mid-80's vintage assume software flow control (Xon/Xoff)
between the computer and the modem. Modems with this design send extra
characters during and after the transmitted data. The Service Processor cannot
tolerate these extra characters. If your configuration includes such a modem, your
functional results may be unpredictable.

The sample modem configuration files included in this package do not support these
modems, so custom configuration files would be necessary. Anchor Automation
2400E is an example of such a modem.

Most newer modems do not use this design. It is recommended you use modems of
newer vintage if you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be
due to Xon/Xoff characters.

D-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Ring Detection

Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they detect a ring signal.
Some modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal they receive. AT&T
DataPort 2001 is an example of such a modem.

The Service Processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings
when Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an
interrupt on only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring.
Otherwise, you may choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count that
makes your operation convenient.

Terminal Emulators

The Service Processor is compatible with simple ASCII terminals, and therefore
compatible with most emulators. It is for the cases when a remote session is
handed off from the Service Processor to the operating system that agreeing terminal
emulators becomes important.

The server's operating system will have some built-in terminal emulators. You may
also have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local
and host computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so the key
assignments and responses will match. This will assure successful communications
and control.

For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.

Recovery Procedures

Line noises, power surges, etc., can sometimes cause your modem to enter an
undefined state. When it is being used for dial in, dial out or Ring Indicate
Power-On, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions is expected. If
one of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has been initialized, it
may be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-5


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If your modem communicates properly with remote users, it is probably in control. It
may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to
assure it has been initialized recently.

Another strategy, particularly if your system is difficult to access physically, is to


protect it with an Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge
protector.

In case recovery becomes necessary, your system should be shut down as


gracefully as possible. Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to
drain capacitance while power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem
power, then reconnect system power to allow complete reinitialization of your system.

Seamless Transfer of a Modem Session

There are about as many modem command variations as there are modems. The
sample modem configuration files have been written to capture the largest number of
workable modem settings.

The modem command &Dn (where 'n' is a number) generally sets the modem
response to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server's serial port. The
desired response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled,
and drop the connection when DTR is released. This is the mechanism by which the
server "hangs up" on a connection under normal conditions.

Usually the command &D2 will work, but not always. The sample modem
configuration files2 take this high percentage position. You should consult your
modem's manual for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.

There are two methods for dealing with the modem's response to DTR:
1. Recovery
2. Prevention

Before proceeding with one of these strategies, you need to determine if your
server's modem is set up properly to respond to DTR.

D-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the primary
console device, there are two tests you can perform:
1. Will the modem drop the connection after the "System initialization complete"
message appears at the remote terminal?
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your modem manual
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of
the sample modem configuration files2.
2. Will the server's modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make this
observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shutdown and
power off. (The AIX command shutdown -F will do this.) Watch for the message
NO CARRIER on your remote terminal.
If yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.
If no, try another &Dn setting for your server's modem. See your model manual
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of
the sample modem configuration files2.

Recovery Strategy

The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to establish a remote session.
This is the easiest solution to implement, and allows more freedom for configuring
your server's serial ports.

To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the Service Processor and start the
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be
dropped. At this point, you call the server back and the operating system will answer
and offer you the login prompt.

2 Only the following sample modem configuration files contain the &Dn command (in three places each):
Ÿ modem_f.cfg
Ÿ modem_f0.cfg
Ÿ modem_f1.cfg
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response. If your remote
terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command the remote terminal emulator to hang
up. This then breaks the connection.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-7


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Prevention Strategy

The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it initializes the primary
console. The tests listed above are conducted with the remote terminal selected as
the primary console to manifest the modem's response to DTR transitions.

If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your


server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal will no
longer experience the connection loss.

If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.

If you choose to use the unused serial port as the primary console, some
initialization traffic will be sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result,
that serial device's connection and function could be affected. These impacts may
make that port unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.

D-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Modem Configuration Samples

Sample File modem_z.cfg


#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage
# modems which respond to neither the ATZð reset command nor the extended (&)
# commands. Refer to your modem manual.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Z Reset to factory defaults Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.


# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-9


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.


expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number


# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.


expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem


# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

D-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Sample File modem_z0.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Zð
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the ATZð reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZð command
# and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem
# manual.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# Zð Reset. Restore Profile ð Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.


# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-11


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.


expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number


# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.


expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "ATZðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem


# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

D-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Sample File modem_f.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file
# Fð or F1 is recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F Reset to default profile Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.


# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-13


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.


expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number


# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.


expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&FQðT\r" # Reset to factory defaults.


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2\r" # Detect carrier and DTR.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem


# responses.

D-14 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-15


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Sample File modem_f0.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Fð
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&Fð reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early
# vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is recommended. If your modem responds to
# the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn't
# work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &Fð Reset. Restore profile ð Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.


# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.

D-16 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.


expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number


# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.


expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&FðQðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile ð


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-17


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
done # RI Power On enabled.

error: # Handle unexpected modem


# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

D-18 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Sample File modem_f1.cfg
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes\ compatible modems.
# This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.
# This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work
# properly with setup Fð. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Zð is
# recommended.
#
# \ Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996
# All Rights Reserved
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the
# factory default settings.

ICDelay 1
DefaultTO 1ð
CallDelay 12ð
# AT Attention Code , Inserts delay in dialing commands
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Qð Turn on responses
# Eð Turn echo off Q1 Turn off responses
# Vð Use numeric responses Sð=ð Automatic answer inhibit
# +++ Escape to command mode Sð=2 Answer on second ring
# Hð Hang-up Xð=ð Limit modem response codes
# T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a
# no op to maintain program synchronization
# when modem may/will echo the commands.
#
# &C1 Detect CD &D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)
#
# %N Call-Out phone number %P Paging phone number
# %S Modem speed (available to users)
#
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:
# 16, 15, 12, 1ð, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; ð=OK
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").

condout: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

connect: send "ATDT%N\r" # Tone dialing command.


# %N from Call Home setup.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-19


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
timeout 6ð
done

retry: send "A/" # Repeat the previous command.

# Expect a connection response.


expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"
timeout 6ð
done

disconnect:
delay 2 # Separate from previous data.
send "+++" # Assure command mode.
delay 2 # Allow mode switching delay.
send "ATHðT\r" # Set modem switch-hook down
# (i.e., hang up).
ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðQ1\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
# Disable responses.
ignore "ð\r" timeout 1
done

condin: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=2\r" # Set AutoAnswer ON
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done

waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1 # Ignore first ring.


expect "2\r" timeout 1ð # Pick up second ring
# or timeout.
# Expect a connection response.
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "1ð\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"
timeout 6ð
done

page: send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r" # %N = pager call center number


# Add enough commas to wait for
# time to enter paging number.
# %R = paging number

# Confirm successful command.


expect "ð\r" timeout 6ð
delay 2 # Wait before hanging up.
send "ATHðT\r" # Hang up.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.
done

ripo: send "AT&F1QðT\r" # Reset modem. Select profile 1


ignore "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.
send "ATEðT\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,
expect "ð\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Enable responses (Numeric),
send "ATQðVðXðT\r" # Limit response codes.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.
send "ATSð=ð\r" # Set AutoAnswer OFF
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r" # Detect carrier and DTR,
# Ignore RTS.
expect "ð\r" timeout 2 # Confirm command successful.
done # RI Power On enabled.

D-20 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


error: # Handle unexpected modem
# responses.
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"
delay 2
done

Appendix D. Modem Configurations D-21


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
D-22 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases

This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the Service Processor (SP).

SP Power Applied

6
┌─────┐ Pre-Standby Phase
│ 6 │
│ 6
│ Standby Phase SP Menus Available
│ │
│ 6
│ Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available
│ │
│ 6
│ Runtime Phase Diagnostic Service Aids Available
│ │
└──────────────────┘

Pre-Standby Phase

This phase is entered when the server is connected to a power source. The server
may or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited when the Power-On Self
Tests (POSTS) and configurations tasks are completed.

The Pre-Standby phase components are:


Ÿ SP Initialization
SP performs any necessary hardware and software initializations.
Ÿ SP POST
SP conducts Power-On Self Tests on its various work and code areas.
Ÿ SP Unattended Start Mode Checks
To assist fault recovery. If unattended start mode is set, the SP automatically
reboots the server. SP will not wait for a user-input or power-on command, but
will move straight through the phase and into the Bringup Phase. The
unattended start mode can be reset by accessing SMS menus, or SP menus.

Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases E-1


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Standby Phase

The standby phase can be reached in two ways:


1. With the server OFF and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in
the LCD display.
2. With the server ON after an operating system fault, recognized by STBY or an
8-digit code in the LCD display.

In the Standby phase, the SP takes care of some automatic duties and is available
for menus operation. The SP remains in the standby phase until a power-on request
is detected.

The Standby phase components are:


Ÿ Modem Configuration
SP will configure the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls may be received,
or outgoing calls may be placed.
Ÿ Dial In
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the
password and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be
mirrored on the local ASCII console if the server is so equipped and the user
enables this function.
Ÿ Menus
The SP menus are password protected. Before you can access them you need
to know either General User (Power-On Password or POP) or Privileged User
(Privileged Access Password or PAP).

Bring-Up Phase

This phase is entered upon power-on, and exited upon loading of the operating
system.

The Bring-up phase components are:


Ÿ Retry Request Check
The SP will check to see if the previous IPL attempt failed. If two consecutive
fails are detected, the SP displays an error code and places an outgoing call to
notify an external party if the user has enabled this option.
Ÿ Dial Out

E-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The SP can dial a pre-programmed telephone number in the event of an IPL
failure. The SP issues an error report with the last reported IPL status indicated
and any other available error information.
Ÿ Update Operator Panel
The SP displays Operator Panel data on the ASCII terminal if a remote
connection is active.
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Monitoring is now controlled by the SP instead of the base
system, with expanded error recording and reporting.
Ÿ System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)
The SP will monitor and time the interval between system firmware heartbeats.
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands
The SP will respond to any command issued by the system processor.

Runtime Phase

This phase includes the tasks that the SP performs during steady-state execution of
the operating system.
Ÿ Environmental Monitoring
The SP monitors voltages, temperatures and fan speeds (on some servers).
Ÿ Responding to System Processor Commands
The SP will respond to any command issued by the system processor.
Ÿ Run-Time Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the SP will monitor the
system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the SP places an outgoing call.
This is different from the Bringup Phase scenario where two reboot attempts are
made before placing an outgoing call.

Appendix E. Service Processor Operational Phases E-3


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
E-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index

AIX location codes 3-48, 3-54


Numerics
1.12 GB, 2.25 GB, and 4.51 GB SSA
disk drives 3-93 B
backplane
removal and replacement 6-20
A battery
about this book xv
removal and replacement 6-38
account number B-22
beginning the service aids 3-65
active
boot list 4-2
SSA link 3-60
broken loop
adapter
cable removed 3-86
code package ID 3-92
disk drive module removed 3-88
description of 3-93
bus SRN to FRU Table 3-27
finding the physical location 3-90
POSTs (power-on self-tests) A-2
SSA 3-59 C
port connector 3-90 cables
vital product data (VPD) 3-93 power 1-12, 7-7
adapters cache module, fast-write 3-94
removal and replacement 6-22 call home, see call out
aids, diagnostic call out (call-home) B-31
adapter POSTs (power-on call-in
self-tests) A-2 testing C-2
disk drive module POSTs (power-on call-out
self-tests) A-1 policy B-20
SRNs (service request testing C-2
numbers) A-3, A-5 card, SSA adapter 3-59
aids, service CD-ROM drive
Certify Disk 3-81 removal and replacement 6-19
Configuration Verification 3-77 cfgmgr command 2-38
Format Disk 3-79 check points B-5, B-14
Link Verification 3-73 checklist, setup C-1
Set Service Mode 3-67 checkpoints 3-29
starting 3-65 firmware 3-32
unavailable 3-90 service processor 3-29
vital product data (VPD) 3-93 codes, location 3-58

Index X-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
commands diagnostics, online 4-1
cfgmgr 2-38, 3-92 diagnostics, standalone 4-1
diag -a A-12 dial-out telephone numbers,
lsattr -E -l adapter -a ucode 3-92 setting B-18
send diagnostic A-1 disk
configuration certify, service aid 3-81
complete system 3-92 format, service aid 3-79
invalid SSA loop A-15 formatting, incompatible with the
manager command 3-92 system 2-38
Configuration Verification service disk drive module
aid 3-77 1.12 GB, 2.25 GB, and 4.51
connector GB 3-93
port, on SSA adapter 3-90 broken loop 3-86, 3-88
console mirroring finding the physical location 3-90
enable/disable B-9 Format Disk service aid 3-79
quick disconnect B-32 identification 3-61
system configuration B-32 missing 3-75
continuous failure 2-35 POSTs (power-on self-tests) A-1
covers serial number 3-61
removal and replacement 6-3 strings 3-60
customer administration center B-19 unavailable to the using
system 3-67
diskette drive
D removal and replacement 6-19
data flow 1-8
DRAM (dynamic random-access
data path 3-59, 3-62, 3-86
memory) 3-93
data, vital product 3-93
dynamic random-access memory
definition of FRU names used in the
(DRAM) 3-93
SRN table A-5
device configuration method 3-92
device driver level 3-93 E
devices, handling static–sensitive 6-2 entry point, MAPs 2-37
devices, startup 5-8 EPROM
diag -a command A-12 updates B-33
diagnostic aids EPROM (programmable read-only
adapter POSTs (power-on memory) A-2
self-tests) A-2 error
disk drive module POSTs (power-on microcode and software A-5
self-tests) A-1 unrecoverable 3-83
SRNs (service request
numbers) A-3, A-5

X-2 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


error code to FRU index 3-1
error codes
H
handling static–sensitive devices 6-2
firmware 3-2
hdisk (LUN) 3-61
POST 3-1
heartbeat B-29
error logs B-14
how to use MAPs 2-35

F I
failed
I/O planar
application program 3-83
removal and replacement 6-31
status 3-74
I/O planar locations 1-4
failure
ID, adapter code package 3-92
continuous 2-35
identification, pdisks, hdisks, and disk
link 3-83
drive module 3-61
fans
identify function 3-65, 3-70, 3-90
removal and replacement 6-42
inactive
fast-write cache module 3-94
SSA connector 3-60
finding the physical location of a
index, error code to FRU 3-1
device 3-90
information
Format Disk service aid 3-79
SSA network 3-76
format, location code 3-58
invalid SSA loop configurations A-15
fragility of disk drive modules A-1
FRU
names used in the SRN table A-5 L
used in the SRN table A-5 language selection B-15
Function Select menu 3-65 laser safety information xiii
function, identify 3-65, 3-90 level
device driver 3-93
light
G on connectors 3-60
general access password,
link
changing B-9
active 3-60
general user menus B-4
failure 3-83
glossary of FRU names used in the
Link Verification service aid 3-73
SRN table A-5
loading the system diagnostics 4-1
good status 3-74
location
green light
code format 3-58
on connectors 3-59, 3-60
physical, of a device 3-90
location code
format 3-46

Index X-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
location codes 3-46, 3-48 menu inactivity B-3
AIX 3-54 menus
physical 3-46 Certify Disk service aid 3-81
ssa 3-58 Configuration Verification service
locations aid 3-77
I/O 1-4 Format Disk service aid 3-79
memory 1-6 Function Select 3-65
system card 1-6 general user B-4
system unit 1-1 Link Verification service aid 3-73
logical units (LUN) 3-61 privileged user B-6
loop service processor B-3
broken 3-86 service processor call-in/call-out
configurations, SSA, invalid A-15 setup B-16
data paths, description of 3-62 service processor call-out policy
links 3-59 setup B-20
SSA, rules 3-61 service processor customer account
loops 3-60 setup B-22
lsattr -E -l adapter -a ucode service processor language
command 3-92 selection B-15
LUN (logical units) 3-61 service processor reboot policy
setup B-23
service processor serial port
M selection B-17
maintenance analysis procedures
service processor serial port speed
(MAPs) 2-1, 2-35
setup B-18
minimum configuration Map 2-17
service processor setup B-8
power MAP 2-12
service processor system
problem determination MAP 2-6
information B-13
maintenance, microcode 3-92
service processor system power
manufacturer and plant code 3-93
control B-12
MAPs (maintenance analysis
service processor telephone
procedures)
setup B-18
starting 2-37
Set Service Mode service aid 3-67
using 2-35
SSA Service Aids 3-65
memory bits 3-26
support menus
memory card locations 1-6
service processor menus B-2
memory hang
service processor service
memory module
aids B-2
removal and replacement 6-29
SMS B-2

X-4 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


messages, SP checkpoints 3-29 NVRAM B-14
microcode
maintenance 3-92
software errors A-5
O
OK 2-1, 3-31, E-2
minimum configuration Map 2-17
online diagnostics 4-1
missing disk drive module 3-75
operational phases, SP
mode, set service 3-67
standby E-2
modem
operator panel 1-7
configuration file selection D-2
operator panel control assembly
configurations D-1
operator panel control
seamless transfer D-6
assembly 6-45
modem_f.cfg, sample file D-13
removal and replacement 6-45
modem_f0.cfg, sample file D-16
operator panel display
modem_f1.cfg, sample file D-19
removal and replacement 6-44
modem_z.cfg, sample file D-9
modem_z0.cfg, sample file D-11
module, disk drive P
1.12 GB, 2.25 GB, and 4.51 pager B-18, B-19
GB 3-93 parallel card
broken loop 3-86, 3-88 removal and replacement 6-46
finding the physical location 3-90 parts information 7-1
Format Disk service aid 3-79 passwords
identification 3-61 changing general access
missing 3-75 password B-9
power-on self-tests (POSTs) A-1 changing privileged access
serial number 3-61 password B-9
strings 3-60 overview B-9
unavailable to the using paths, data
system 3-67 broken loop 3-86
module, fast-write cache 3-94 description of 3-62
pdisk
identification 3-61
N with no associated hdisk 2-38
names used in the SRN table A-5
physical
network information, SSA 3-76
disk drives (pdisks) 3-61, 3-67
numbers, service request
location of a device 3-90
description of A-3
physical location codes 3-46, 3-48
software and microcode errors A-5
plant code and manufacturer 3-93
table A-6
pluggable fast-write cache
module 3-94

Index X-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
port RAM (random-access memory) 3-93
(P) value 3-90 Random-access memory (RAM) 3-93
connector on SSA adapter 3-90 read system, POST errors B-5, B-14
POS (programmable option read-only memory (ROM) 3-93
select) A-2 Read-only storage (ROS) 3-93
POST error codes 3-1 reboot recovery B-23, B-27
POST errors related publications xv
read B-5, B-14 remote latency B-21
POSTs (power-on self-tests) A-1 remote timeout B-21
power removal and replacement
status 3-74 procedures 6-1
power cables 1-12, 7-7 adapters 6-22
power MAP 2-12 backplane 6-20
power supply battery 6-38
removal and replacement 6-15 CD-ROM drive 6-19
power-on methods B-26 covers 6-3
power-on self-tests (POSTs) A-1, A-2 diskette drive 6-19
preface xv fan 6-42
primary console D-8 I/O planar 6-31
privileged access password, memory module 6-29
changing B-9 operator panel display 6-44
privileged user menus B-6 power supply 6-15
problem determination Processor card 6-35
POSTs, adapter A-2 serial cable 6-46
POSTs, disk drive module A-1 service processor 6-37
SRNs (service request tape drive 6-19
numbers) A-3 reserved status 3-65, 3-74
using service aids 3-84 reset Service Processor B-11
problem determination MAP 2-6 restart recovery B-23, B-27
Processor card RETAIN B-22
removal and replacement 6-35 retries B-21
programmable option select ring indicator power-on B-12
(POS) A-2 ROM (read-only memory) 3-93
programmable read-only memory ROS (read-only storage) 3-92, 3-93
(EPROM) A-2 rules for SSA loops 3-61
progress indicators B-5, B-14
S
R safety
electrical xi

X-6 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


safety notices xi service processor menus (continued)
seamless transfer of a modem setup menu B-8
session D-6 supported menu options B-2
select, function menu 3-65 system information B-13
send diagnostic command A-1 system power control B-12
sequence, startup 5-8 telephone number B-18
serial cable service processor setup C-1
removal and replacement 6-46 service processor setup checklist C-1
serial number 3-61 service processor test C-1
service aids service provider B-19
available 3-90 service request numbers (SRNs)
Certify Disk 3-81 description of A-3
Configuration Verification 3-77 software and microcode errors A-5
Format Disk 3-79 table A-6
link failure 3-83 Set Service Mode service aid 3-67
Link Verification 3-73 software and microcode errors A-5
Set Service Mode 3-67 sp checklist C-1
starting SSA 3-65 SP checkpoints 3-29
unavailable 3-90 sp installation
vital product data (VPD) 3-93 checklist C-1
service center B-19 SP operational phases E-1
service inspection guide 1-13 sp setup C-1
service processor 6-37 sp test C-1
removal and replacement 6-37 specifications, system unit 1-10
service processor checklist C-1 SRNs (service request numbers) A-3,
checklist C-1 A-5, A-6
service processor menus SSA (serial storage architecture)
accessing locally B-3 adapter 3-59, 3-93
accessing remotely B-3 address (AA) value 3-90
call-in/call-out B-16 inactive connector 3-60
call-out policy B-20 link
customer account B-22 active 3-60
general user B-4 loop
language selection B-15 configurations, invalid A-15
menu inactivity B-3 links 3-59
privileged user B-6 rules 3-61
reboot policy B-23 network information 3-76
restart policy B-23 service aids 3-64
serial port selection B-17 Certify Disk 3-81
serial port speed setup B-18 Configuration Verification 3-77
error codes 3-83

Index X-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SSA (serial storage architecture) system programs (continued)
(continued) Sys Config 5-5
service aids (continued) Utilities 5-10
finding the physical location of a system unit locations 1-1
device 3-90
Format Disk 3-79
identify function 3-65
T
table
Link Verification 3-73
service request numbers
Set Service Mode 3-67
(SRNs) A-6
starting 3-65
tape drive
SSA Hot-Swap Disk Drive
removal and replacement 6-19
vital product data (VPD) 3-93
test, memory 3-42
SSA-address (AA) value 3-91
testing the setup
standalone diagnostics 4-1
call-in C-2
start talk mode B-10
call-out C-2
Start Up program 5-8
starting
MAPs 2-37 U
service aids 3-65 unattended start mode,
starting system programs 5-1, 5-24 enable/disable B-12
STBY 2-1, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-22, unavailable service aids 3-90
2-23, 3-31, E-2 Unplug all power cords (cables) 6-5
strings, disk drive module 3-60 unrecoverable error 3-83
surveillance using
failure B-29 MAPs 2-35
operating system B-29 service aids 3-65
set parameters B-11 SRN table A-3
system firmware B-29 Utilities program 5-10
Sys Config program 5-5
system administrator B-19
system card locations 1-6
V
value, port (P) 3-90
system data flow 1-8
verification
system information menu B-13
configuration, service aid 3-77
system phone number B-20
link, service aid 3-73
system POST errors
serial number 3-80, 3-82
read B-5, B-14
vital product data (VPD) 3-93
system power-on methods B-26
voice phone number B-20
system programs 5-1
VPD (vital product data) B-13
Start Up 5-8
starting 5-1, 5-24

X-8 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


VPD, vital product data 3-93

Index X-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
X-10 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Reader's Comments — We'd Like to Hear From You

&title.

Part Number: &partnum.

Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book?

Very Very
Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Dissatisfied
Overall Satisfaction Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:

Very Very
Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Dissatisfied
Accurate Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø
Complete Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø
Easy to find Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø
Easy to understand Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø
Well organized Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø
Applicable to your tasks Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø

Please tell us how we can improve this book:

Thank you for your response. May we contact you? Ø Yes Ø No

When you send comments to us, you grant us a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute your comments in any way we believe appropriate without incurring
any obligation to you.

X-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
X-12 Service Guide

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
IBM 

Part Number: 07L8343

Printed in the United States of America


on recycled paper containing 10%
recovered post-consumer fiber.

February 1998
ð7L8343

SA38-ð541-ð1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like